Compact Plus System Administration Guide

Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Norstar
Norstar
Compact
Modular Plus
Plus Release
Release 55
System
SystemAdministration
AdministrationGuide
Guide
Published by Nortel Networks on behalf of British Telecommunications PLC. All
possible care has been taken in the preparation of this publication, but British
Telecommunications PLC assumes no liability for any inaccuracies that may occur.
British Telecommunication PLC reserves the right to make changes without notice both
to this publication and to the product that it describes.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a
retrieval system, or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by
any means without prior written permission of British Telecommunications PLC.
If you find any errors in this publication, or would like to make suggestions for its
improvement, please write to:
British Telecommunications
Norstar Product Manager
Weston House
246 High Holborn
London, WC1V 7DQ
British Telecom is a registered trademark of:
British Telecommunications PLC
Registered Office 81, Newgate Street
London, EC1A 7AJ
Registered in England, Number 1800000
Meridian, Companion, and Norstar are trademarks of Nortel Networks.
Meridian Norstar Business Communication System is manufactured by Nortel
Networks.
Touchtone is a trademark of British Telecom.
This document is for use with Compact Plus Release 4 Norstar UK.
P0986921 02
Printed in Canada
©2002 Nortel Networks
iii
Contents
SECTION I: System Administration 9
Introduction
11
Safety and Regulatory information 12
You must be the administrator 13
Here’s what you need to start programming 13
Understanding the telephone keys 15
Starting a programming session 18
Ending a programming session 19
Using passwords to access programming 19
Understanding your system 20
Map of Administrator Plus programming 20
SECTION II: System programming 23
Conventions used in this guide 24
Programming overview 24
Using passwords 29
Programmable settings and features 31
Making suggestions 38
Advice Line 38
Programming Terminals and Extensions
Terminals and extensions 40
Assigning a line to an extension (line access) 40
Assigning line pool access 42
Assigning a Prime line to an extension 42
Assigning intercom keys to an extension 43
Assigning an Answer key to an extension 44
Setting the Originating Line Identification for an extension
39
45
Programming Hospitality Services
Hospitality extensions 48
Alarm time (AL) feature 49
Hospitality Services admin alarm feature
Room occupancy (RO) 52
Room condition (RC) 53
Service time 55
47
51
Software Keys
Viewing the System ID
Software Keys 58
57
58
Setting System speed dial
61
Setting System speed dial 62
Assigning a number to a System speed dial code 62
Selecting a line 63
Setting the system to display a name instead of a number
Setting the speed dial number to bypass restrictions 65
P0607114 Issue 01
63
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
iv
Naming extensions and lines
Naming extensions
Naming lines 69
67
68
Changing the time and date
71
Changing the time and date 72
Changing the time 72
Changing the date 73
Changing the time and date using the Basic password
Changing the time by an hour 74
Automatic Time & Date 74
73
Assigning a Direct-Dial extension
75
Programming Direct-Dial 76
Programming an internal Direct-Dial extension 76
Programming an external Direct-Dial extension 77
Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions)
Using restriction filters to bar calls 80
Assigning filters to a telephone (Extn restrns) 83
Assigning filters to a line (Line restrns) 84
Assigning filters to a line/extension (Line/extn restrns)
Class of Service passwords 86
Assigning a remote access filter 89
Locking an extension 93
Preventing Last Number Redial 94
Preventing Saved Number Redial 94
Preventing Recall 95
Preventing Redirect 96
Programming capabilities
79
85
97
Programming an extension 98
Setting Call Forward no answer 98
Setting Call Forward on Busy 100
Programming Do Not Disturb on Busy 101
Programming Handsfree 102
Programming Handsfree answerback 103
Assigning a Pickup group 104
Assigning a page zone 104
Programming paging 105
Assigning telephones to the Direct-Dial extension
Allowing Priority call 107
Assigning a Hotline 108
Auxiliary ringer 109
Activating Redirect ring 109
Receive tones 110
106
Programming User preferences
111
Programming User preferences 112
Changing the key programming for an extension 112
Changing a personal (user) speed dial code 113
Changing the Call log options 114
Changing the dialling options 114
Changing the display language 115
Changing the display contrast 116
Changing the Ring type 116
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
v
Programming Hunt groups
119
Programming Hunt Groups 120
Adding or removing members from a group 121
Moving members of a group 122
Assigning or unassigning lines to a group 122
Assigning a distinctive ring pattern to a Hunt Group 123
Setting the distribution mode 124
Setting the hunt delay 125
Programming options if all hunt members are busy 125
Programming the queue timeout 126
Programming the overflow extension 127
Setting the name 127
Checking hunt group metrics 128
Programming feature settings
131
Background music 132
On hold 132
Receiver volume 133
Camp timeout 133
Park timeout 134
Park mode 135
Transfer callback 136
Network callback 137
Held line reminder and delay 137
Conference tone 138
Directed (call) pickup 139
Page tone 139
Page timeout 140
Call log space 140
Alarm extension 141
Answer extension 142
Setting SWCA controls 143
CLID Match 144
Moving and copying
Extension relocation 146
Copying programming for telephones
145
147
Settings for analogue equipment
151
Settings for analogue equipment 152
Setting the delay before the ATA/I-ATA answers 152
Changing the dial mode of an ATA or an I-ATA 153
Setting whether the ATA/I-ATA should receive system tones
Setting whether an ATA is used on-site or off-site 155
Services
157
Using alternate or scheduled services 158
Turning services on or off 158
Designating alternate routes for calls 161
Programming routes 163
Programming destination codes 164
Turning a manual service on or off with a feature code
Assigning control extensions 168
Changing the name of a schedule 169
Changing the time of a schedule 170
P0607114 Issue 01
154
167
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
vi
Passwords
171
Password security 172
Setting the SAPLUS password 172
Setting the Administrator password 173
Setting the Basic password 173
Hospitality passwords 174
I-RAD password 175
Call services
Erasing a forgotten Call log password
Programming Call services 179
1st Display 179
Auto called ID 180
177
178
Remote access
181
Programming lines and features for remote access
Auto Attendant
182
187
Auto Attendant 188
System Answer 188
Custom Call Routing (CCR) 189
CCR groups 189
Direct extension dialling 190
Customising System Answer and CCR 190
Turning System Answer on or off 191
Turning CCR on or off 191
Choosing the attendant telephone 191
Setting the number of rings before System Answer answers a call 192
Setting the number of rings before a caller hears the CCR greeting 192
Adding or removing extensions from a CCR group 193
Using the pre-recorded greetings 194
Using customised greetings for System Answer and CCR 194
Recording customised greetings for System Answer and CCR 196
Programming or changing CCR destinations 197
Testing your custom System Answer and CCR 197
Maintenance
199
Beginning a Maintenance session 200
Checking the system version of the software
System Administration Log record 201
201
Troubleshooting
Recording and reporting alarm codes
Clearing lines 204
Power failure 205
Power-fail telephone 206
203
204
SECTION III: Using telephone features 207
About your system telephones
209
T7316E Business Series Terminals and KIMs 210
T7316 Business Series Terminal key defaults 213
M7324N telephone and CAPN 214
M7310N telephone 215
M7208N/T7208 telephones 216
M7100N/T7100 telephones 217
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
vii
M7000/T7000 telephones 217
Release key 218
Visually Impaired Operator Console 218
Common feature display messages 219
Customising your telephone
223
Dialling mode 224
Display contrast 225
Key Inquiry 225
Moving line keys 226
Ring type 227
Ring volume 227
Programming M7000/T7000 memory keys
227
Using personal features
Background music 230
Do Not Disturb 230
Personal Speed Dial codes
Using Speed Dial 231
229
231
Answering calls
233
Answering a call 234
Sorting calls by distinctive ring patterns 234
Privacy feature (external calls only) 234
Answering the next queued call 235
Answering hunt group calls 235
Multiple appearances of DIA lines 236
Using SWCA line buttons 236
Using Handsfree 239
Answering a telephone using Directed Pickup 240
Answering a telephone using Pickup Group 241
Answer keys 242
Listening in a group 243
Disconnecting accidentally 243
Malicious call identification (MCID) 243
Holding calls
245
Holding 246
Listening on hold 247
Routing calls
249
Call Parking 250
DIA calls 251
Making a Priority call 253
Transferring a call 253
Transferring to a busy extension (Call Camping)
Making external calls
Using an exchange code 258
Using line pools 258
Making a conference call 259
Using Class of Service passwords
257
263
Making internal calls
Making an internal call 266
Making a conference call 266
Accessing a Direct-Dial extension
P0607114 Issue 01
254
265
266
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
viii
Leaving messages 267
Paging 270
Remote paging 270
Voice call 271
Forwarding calls
273
Forwarding all calls 274
External Call forward 275
Line redirection 276
Saving time with features
279
Using System Speed Dial 280
Using Autodial 280
Using Redial 282
Programming memory keys 283
Using Ring Again 284
Using Hotline 285
Using display features
287
Time and Date 288
Static Time 288
Call Duration Timer 288
Call Information 289
Call Log 290
Autobumping 295
Special dialling features
297
Special dialling features 298
Inserting a pause 298
Setting Long tones 298
Programmed Release 299
Recall 299
Run/Stop 299
Wait for Dial Tone 300
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
ISDN services 302
Digital Network Adapter
301
304
Feature quick reference
305
Compact Plus feature codes 306
ISDN terminal features 309
ATA extension features 311
Appendix A: Programming overviews
313
Charts
315
Index
335
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
SECTION I: System Administration
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
10
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Introduction
• Safety and Regulatory information.........12
• You must be the administrator.........13
• Here’s what you need to start programming.........13
• Understanding the telephone keys.........15
• Starting a programming session.........18
• Ending a programming session.........19
• Using passwords to access programming.........19
• Understanding your system.........20
• Map of Administrator Plus programming.........20
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
12 Introduction
Safety and Regulatory information
Markings
The CE Marking on this equipment indicates compliance with
the following:
This device conforms to Directive 1999/5/EC on Radio
Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment as
adopted by the European Parliament And Of The Council.
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product
may cause radio interference in which case the user may be
required to take adequate measures.
Hereby, Nortel Networks declares that Compact ICS, is in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Information is subject to change without notice. Nortel Networks
reserves the right to make changes in design or components as
progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant. This
equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
European Safety requirements EN 60950 and EMC requirements
EN 55022 (Class A) and EN 55024. These EMC limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial and
light industrial environment.
WARNING!
This is a class A product. In a domestic
environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be
required to take adequate measures. The
above warning is inserted for regulatory
reasons. If any customer believes that they
have an interference problem, either because
their Nortel Networks product seems to cause
interference or suffers from interference, they
should contact their distributor immediately.
The distributor will assist with a remedy for any
problems and, if necessary, will have full
support from Nortel Networks.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Introduction 13
You must be the administrator
If the installer has given this guide to you, you’re most likely the
system administrator.
As an administrator, your role is to
• help your colleagues learn to use their Norstar and Business
Series Terminal (BST) telephones
• change Norstar programming to customise the system for your
office or to keep up with changes in your office environment
or personnel
• call for help or service when necessary
System Administration Guide contains all the information you
need to become proficient at using and programming the
Compact Plus system.
Here’s what you need to start programming
By following instructions on the telephone display and by
pressing a few keys, you can change the Compact Plus system to
suit the specific needs of your office. Before you begin
programming, make sure you have one of the following:
• T7316E telephone and the T7316/T7316E programming
overlay.
Heading
Show
Back
Next
T7316E
programming
buttons
Business
Series
Terminal
Heading
Show
Back
Next
T7316
programming
buttons
Programming
overlay
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
14 Introduction
• an M7310N telephone and its programming overlay
Heading
Norstar
Programming
Overlay
M7310N
Back
Show
Next
OR
• an M7324N telephone and its programming overlay.
Norstar Programming Overlay M7324N
Heading
Show
Back
Next
Placing the programming overlay
Place the programming overlay on the appropriate memory keys
as shown in the preceding illustrations. Four memory keys have
special functions during a programming session. Once you exit
programming, the keys return to their normal functions. The
programming keys are active or inactive at different stages of
programming. When a key is active, the indicator next to it is lit
with a (ª or º).
This is what each programming key does:
Heading—shows you the heading for the current level
Back—moves you back one item at the current level
Show—shows you the first setting within the level
Next—moves you one item forward at the current level
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Introduction 15
The diagram below visually shows you how the overlay buttons
move through the menus.
Terminals&Extns
EXT: 221
Back
Current display
EXT: 222
Heading
Show
Next
Line Access
EXT: 223
Understanding the telephone keys
Take a few minutes to study the telephones. Notice that the T7316
and M7324 telephones do not have a Shift key or dual memory
keys.
Locate the different items shown in the following illustrations.
T7316E
2
3
9
7
8
4
1
11
4
10
12
T7316
3
9
1
2
7
4
8
4
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
16 Introduction
M7310N
8 7
9
3
2
6
1
4
5
5
M7324N
6
8 7
2
33
1
4
4
4
The following table describes the various items.
1 keypad
Used for dialling numbers when you are making calls and for
entering numbers and letters when you are programming.
2 Display
Shows instructions for using and programming the telephone.
3 Display key
Activates the instruction that appears on the display above the
display key.
4 Memory key
Activates a number or feature code stored in the key.
5 Dual memory key
Can store two numbers or feature codes (M7310N only).
6 Shift key
Press the Shift key before a dual memory key to activate the
number or feature code stored in the secondary memory of the
dual memory key (M7310N only).
7 Feature key
(≤, ƒ or ƒ)
8 Hold key
Allows you to enter a feature code while using or programming the
telephone.
Puts an active call on hold.
(˙, ˙)
9 Release key (®, ®,
Hangs up an active call or ends programming.
®)
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Introduction 17
10 Mute key
Mutes handset and microphone.
Only available on T7316 and T7316E keystations.
11 Handsfree key
Turns on speaker so user does not have to pick up handset or use
headset.
Only available on T7316E keystations.
12 Headset key
Allows user to use switch between headset and handset answer
mode without removing headset.
Only available on T7316 and T7316E keystations.
Telephone programming buttons
This guide shows the Business Series Terminal (BST) buttons.
The following table shows how the BST (T-series) buttons
compare with the Norstar telephones (M-series).
Button Name
T7316E, T7316, T7208, T7100,
T7000
M7324N, M7310N, M7208N,
M7100N, M7000
Hold
≥˙
≥(T7000)
˙or ˙
≥(M7000)
Release
®
®or ™
Feature
≤
ƒ or ƒ
To use a feature: Press ≤, ƒ or ƒ and enter the
feature code. For example: Press ≤·°⁄ to access your
mailbox.
Note: The BST terminal programming keys have label tabs
beside the buttons.
Entering numbers and letters using the keypad
Use the keys on the telephone keypad to enter numbers and letters
during programming. When you enter programming or use a
feature code, the keys you press often spell a word. For example,
when you press ≤••¤flfl‹››, the number keys
spell CONFIG. The C is on key number 2, the O is on key number
6, the N is also on key number 6, and so on. However, the display
shows numbers instead of letters. The word just provides an easy
way to remember the sequence of numbers.
Entering names using the keypad
When you want to use a key to spell a name, such as naming a
hunt group during programming, the function of the key changes
according to the number of times you press the key. The
following illustration shows the functions for the keypad key ‹
when entering letters.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
18 Introduction
Keypad key
press once for the letter D
press twice for the letter E
press three times for the letter F
press four times for the number 3
More about display keys
Use the three display keys below the display on your telephone to
set and select options. Their function depends on the instruction
that appears on the display directly above each key. Some display
instructions that you may see during programming are DOWN, UP,
or OK.
Display keys
Instructions for display keys
Contrast level 2
DOWN
UP
Display text
OK
Display keys
Starting a programming session
As administrator, the first steps in making any change to the
Compact Plus system are always the same. You must press the
≤ button and then press ••¤flfl‹›› to access
Configuration programming.
Jan1 1:00am
Press ≤.
Feature:∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫
∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫
Press ••¤flfl‹››
(CONFIG).
Password:∫∫∫∫∫∫∫
∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫RETRY
Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN).
Press RETRY to re-enter the password if it is
entered incorrectly.
Terminals&Extns∫
∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫
The display shows the first of the seven
headings available for programming.
¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN) is the password, unless the password has
been changed. Check Programming Record for the most recent
password.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Introduction 19
Ending a programming session
Possible display
∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫CHANGE
Press ® to end the session.
Endofsession
∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫∫
After a few seconds, the time and date
reappear on the display.
The system proceeds with any changes you make to
programming as soon as you move away from a setting, either by
using the navigation keys or ®.
You can see if the changes you have made to telephone
programming have taken effect by pressing the UPDATE display
key. The display shows you how many telephones are still
waiting to update.
Using passwords to access programming
There are three passwords for Administration programming.
• ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS) — The System Administrator
Plus password accesses all the settings for Administration
programming, plus several installer settings.
• ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN) — The Administrator password
accesses most of the settings for Administration
programming.
• ¤¤‡›¤ (BASIC) — The Basic password accesses a
few settings that can be changed using feature codes.
The Basic password allows you to delegate some of the duties of
being an administrator without allowing access to sensitive
programming. It should be given out with care and changed when
necessary (for example, when someone leaves the company).
For information about changing passwords, see “Setting the
Basic password” on page 173. For more information about the
settings that can be changed with the Basic password, see "Using
passwords" on page 29.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
20 Introduction
Understanding your system
Exchange lines have been set up by your installer to be either
public, private, or part of a line pool.
• A public line is assigned to more than one extension.
• A private line is assigned to only one extension and to the
Prime extension for that line.
• A line can be assigned to one of three line pools. Extensions
are assigned access to line pools and they share the lines in the
pool with other extensions having access to that pool.
The Compact Plus system automatically assigns extension 221 as
the Prime extension for each exchange line. The Prime extension
provides back-up answering for all unanswered calls coming in
on the exchange line.
Map of Administrator Plus programming
The programming map on the following pages shows the
headings, sub-headings, and settings that you can view when you
access the programming menus after pressing
≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG) and entering the
Administrator Plus password ‡¤‡fi°‡.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Introduction 21
Programming map (Administrator Plus)
Show extn#
Line access
ˆ Show
Enter extension then
ˆ Show
Terminals & Extns
ˆ Next
or
ˆ Show
ˆ Next
to go through a list of
telephones.
ˆ Next
Capabilities
ˆ Show
ˆ Next
Lines
Show line
ˆ Show
Enter line number or
ˆ Next
Services
Name
Line assignment
ˆ Show, Show line
ˆ Next Line Pool access
ˆ Show, Line Pool A
ˆ Show, Line Pool B
ˆ Show, Line Pool C
ˆ Next Prime line
ˆ Next Intercom keys
ˆ Next Answer extns
ˆ Show, Show extn#
ˆ Show, 221
ˆ Next OLI #
ˆ Next
ˆ Show
ˆ Next
to go through a list of
the lines.
User Prefernces
ˆ Show
ˆ Show
ˆ Next
Sys speed dial
ˆ Next
Name
ˆ Show
Restrictions
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
Passwords
Restrictions
ˆ Next
ˆ Show
ˆ Show
Call Services
Restrn filters
ˆ Next Line restrns
ˆ Next Remote restrns
Time & Date
ˆ Next
Ringing groups
ˆ Show, Sched:Night
ˆ Next Sched:Evening
System Prgrming
ˆ Next
Software keys
Ringing service
ˆ Next
ˆ Show
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
Sched:Lunch
Sched:Sched 4
Restrn service
ˆ Next
ˆ Show
ˆ Next
Usage Metrics
Routing service
ˆ Show
ˆ Next
These
Headings
continue on
next page.
Common settings
ˆ Show
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
Control extns
Schedule names
Sched:Sched 4
Sched:Sched 5
Sched:Sched 6
Routes
ˆ Next Dest codes
ˆ Show, Sched:Night
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
Sched:Evening
Sched:Lunch
Sched:Sched 4
Sched:Sched 5
Sched:Sched 6
Schedule times
Note:
The ˆ symbol means Press. For example,
Press Show, Press Next, or Press Heading.
P0607114 Issue 01
Sched:Night
ˆ Next Sched:Evening
ˆ Next Sched:Lunch
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Show, Fwd to
ˆ Next DND on busy
ˆ Next Handsfree
ˆ Next HF on answerback
ˆ Next Pickup grp
ˆ Next Page zone
ˆ Next Paging
ˆ Next D-Dial
ˆ Next Priority call
ˆ Next Hotline
ˆ Next Aux. ringer
ˆ Next Redirect ring
ˆ Next Receive tones
ˆ Next ATA settings
ˆ Show, ATA ans timer
ˆ Next ATA mode
ˆ Next ATA tones
ˆ Next ATA use
ˆ Next Intrusion
ˆ Show Protect lvl
Sched:Sched 5
Sched:Sched 6
ˆ Next
Maintenance
Fwd no answer
ˆ Show, Fwd to
ˆ Next Fwd on busy
Auto call info
ˆ Show, Show line
ˆ Next 1stDisplay
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
Model
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
Key prgrming
CAP/KIM key progm
User speed dial
Call log opt’ns
Dialling opt’ns
Language
Display cntrst
ˆ Next
Ring type
Restrn filters
ˆ Show, Show filter
ˆ Next Extn restrns
Filters
Extn Lock
Allow last no
Allow saved no
Allow recall
Allow redirect
ˆ Next Line/extn rstrn
ˆ Show, Show line
Auto Called ID
Log space
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
22 Introduction
Speed dial # (enter #)
ˆ Show
ˆ Next
Display digits
(if display digits=N)
Name (Max. 16 characters)
ˆ Show, <name>
COS pswds
ˆ Show, Show pwd#
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Show, Log pswd
SysAdmin+ (727587)
ˆShow Sys admin (23646)
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
Progrming pswds
Lines
ˆ Next
ˆ Show
Hospitality
Services
Hunt groups
ˆ Show
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Show
Featr settings
ˆ Next
ˆ Show
ˆ Next
System Prgrming
Direct-dial
ˆ Show, D-dial1
Hour
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
Time & Date
ˆ Show
ˆ Next
ˆ Show
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
Minutes
Day
ˆ Next
Auto Attendant
ˆ Show
ˆ Next
ˆ Show
Remote access
ˆ Show
ˆ Next
Software keys
ˆ Show
Sys ID
ˆ Next Password
keys
ˆ Next
Hospitality
ˆ Show
ˆ Next
Maintenance
ˆ Show
ˆ Next
Usage Metrics
ˆ Show
Hunt Groups
System version
ˆ Next Clear lines
ˆ Next Sys admin log
ˆ Next
Remote montr
Note:
The ˆ symbol means Press. For example,
Press Show, Press Next, or Press Heading.
Desk pswd 4677 (HOSP)
ˆNext Cond None
Show group
ˆ Show, Member extns
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
ˆ Next
Line assignment
Mode
Hunt delay
If busy
Q Timeout
Overflow
Name
Dstnct ring
Backgrnd music
ˆ Show On hold
ˆ Next, Intrnl #
Year
Month
Basic (22742)
ˆ Show
ˆ Next
Passwords
Bypass restr’n
Call Log pswds
ˆ Show, Show extn#
Terminals & Extns
Sys speed dial
Speed dial number is displayed
ˆ Show, Use prime line
Room/desk info
ˆ Show, Show extn#
ˆ Next Call restrns
ˆ Next Service time
ˆ Next Alarm
ˆ Show Attn attempts
ˆ Next Retry intrvl
ˆ Next Attn duration
ˆ Next Time format
ˆ Next Receiver volume
ˆ Next Camp timeout
ˆ Next Park timeout
ˆ Next Park Mode
ˆ Next Trnsfr callbk
ˆ Next Trnsfr callbk
ˆ Next Netwk callbk
ˆ Next Held reminder
ˆ Next Remind delay
ˆ Next Confrence tone
ˆ Next Directd pickup
ˆ Next Page tone
ˆ Next Page Timeout
ˆ Next AutoTime&Date
ˆ Next Call log space
ˆ Next Alarm Extn
ˆ Next Extn relocation
ˆ Next Answer Extn
ˆ Next SWCA Cntrls
ˆ Next CLID Match
Auto attend
ˆ Show Attd Extn
ˆ Next System Answer
ˆ Next CCR
ˆ Show, After
ˆ Next CCR lines
ˆ Next CCR Groups
ˆ Show, Show group
ˆ Next CCR grp 1
Rem access pkgs
ˆ Show, Show pkg
ˆ Next Rem line access
ˆ Show, Show line
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
SECTION II: System programming
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
24
Conventions used in this guide
This section describes the programming choices available to
assist you in designing a system that is efficient for your business.
When you see a numbered symbol, ⁄, it represents the numbers
on the telephone keypad. A lettered symbol, Å, represents the
letters on the telephone keypad. ™
represents a telephone
key. Keys shown like this, ≤, are found on the Business Series
Terminals telephones. Four keys, –, ≠,
“, and ‘, are labelled on the programming
overlay and represent the temporary use of keys during
programming.
A word shown like this, OK, indicates the action of the display key
located directly below on the display of two-line display
telephones.
All default settings appear in bold in the procedures. For
example, if the default setting is none, it appears as None.
Programming overview
Use programming to change default settings as required. Default
settings for the PBX template are shown in bold in the
programming map on page 26.
Headings and sub-headings in programming help you to know
where you are.
Programming has the following main headings:
Terminals&Extns
Assign settings to each telephon’e.
Lines
Assign settings to each internal, external, and DIA
line.
Services
Create services such as night ringing, routing, and
restrictions for making external calls.
Sys speed dial
Create Speed Dial codes that can be used by any
extension in the system.
Passwords
View and change passwords for programming and
features.
Time&Date
Set the time and date on the system clock.
System prgming
Change system-wide settings, Auto Attendant, and
custom call routing programming.
Call services
Assign settings for external voice message
services.
Software Keys
Upgrade a restricted Feature Cartridge or activate
the Remote Administration feature using key
codes.
Maintenance
View diagnostic information about the system.
Usage Metrics
View statistical information about Hunt group calls.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
25
Each main heading has sub-headings within it. For example,
Terminals&Extns has six sub-headings: Line access,
Capabilities, Name, User preferences, Restrictions, and Call
services.
Using the System Administrator Plus password, you programme
settings for the entire system as well as settings for individual
extensions.
Programming affects system operation.
Only a qualified installer or sales support
officer should perform start-up, installation,
and maintenance programming. Some of
the settings affect the correct operation of
the system.
The first three steps of each procedure are provided to get to
Terminals&Extns on the telephone display and can be used to
programme any individual item at any time. However, when you
are programming the whole system, once you have completed the
first programming item, it is not necessary to start at step 1 of the
next procedure unless you leave programming. Just press
‘ to move to the next item in the programming
sequence.
While you are programming the system, the display occasionally
shows Update. You can press the display key below the word to
see what programming changes the system is undergoing.
Any procedure that specifies using the Administrator (ADMIN)
password can also be accessed using the System Administrator
Plus (SAPLUS) password.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
26
Programming overview (SAPLUS)
Startup
Template: PBX, Square, Hybrid
Start Extension: 221
Terminals & Extns
Show extn#:_
Line access
Line assignment
Show line:_
(Non-DIA line)
L001: Ring only, Appr&Ring, Appr only, Unassigned
(DIA line)
L101: Ring only, Appr&Ring, Appr only, Unassigned
Appearances:1
LinePool access
Line pool A: Y, Line pool B: N, Line pool C: N
Prime line: None, PoolA, Pool C, Intcm
Intercom keys: 2 (0 to 8)
Answer extns
Show extn#:_
221: Unassigned, Appr&Ring, Appr only
OLI #: Extn #
Capabilities
Fwd no answer
Fwd to: None
Forward delay: 2, 3, 4, 6, 10
Fwd on busy
Fwd to: None
DND on busy: 221: N
Handsfree: None, Auto, Std
HF answerback: Y
Pickup grp: None, 1, 2, 3, 4
Page zone: None, 1, 2, 3
Paging: Y
D-Dial: None, Extn1
Priority call: N
Hotline: None, Intrnl, Extrnl
(if Extrnl) Use prime line, Use line, Pool code, Use routing tabl
Aux. ringer: N
Redirect ring: Y
Receive tones: N
ATA settings
ATA ans timer: 3, 5, 7, 10
(If DN is the I-ATA) Use ringback
ATA mode: Tone, Pulse
ATA tones: N
ATA use: On site, Off site
Name: 221
User prefernces
Mdl: M7208N, M7310N, M7324N, M7100N, M7000, T7316E+KIM
Key prgrming
(If M7000/T7000) 1 key
(If M7100N/T7100) 1 key
(If M7208N/T7208) 8 keys (also Norstar Doorphone)
(If M7310N) 10 +24 keys/ T7316 16 + 8 keys
(If T7316E+KIM) 16 + 8 plus 24 keys on each KIM
(If M7324N) 24 keys (also BST Doorphone)
CAP/KIM key prgrming
KIM1, KIM 2 ...
User speed dial
Call log opt’ns: No one answered, Unanswerd by me, Log all calls, No
auto logging
Dialling opt’ns: Automatic dial, Predial, Standard dial
Language: English, Opratng
Display cntrst: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Ring type: 1, 2, 3, 4
Restrictions (extns)
Restrn filters (00-99)
Show filter:_
Restrn flt: 00
No restrictions
Restrn flt 01:
Restrn 01:
Deny: 0
Override 001: 0800
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Restrn 02:
Deny: 1
Override 001: No overrides
Restrn flt: 05
Restrn 01: 010
Deny: 010
No overrides
Restrn 02: 1
Deny: 1
No overrides
Restrn 03: 00
Deny: 00
No overrides
Restrn flt: 06
Restrn 01: <ANY>
Deny: <ANY>
No overrides
Extn restrns
Filters
Normal: 02
Night: 11
Evening: 12
Lunch: 13
Sched 4: 00
Sched 5: 00
Sched 6: 00
Extn lock: None, Partial, Full
Allow last no: Y
Allow saved no: Y
Allow link: Y
Allow redirect: N
Line/extn rstrns
Show line:_
Normal: None
Night: None
Evening: None
Lunch: None
Sched 4: None
Sched 5: None
Sched 6: None
Call Services
Auto call info
Show line:_
Caller ID set: N (Default for DIA: Y)
Call log set: N (Default for DIA: Y)
1stDisplay: Name, Numb, Line
Auto called ID:N
Log space
Log 0 Pool 250
Lines
Name: Line001
Restrictions (lines)
Restrn filters (00-99)
Show filter:_
Restrn flt 00
No restrictions
Restrn flt 01
Restrn 01:
Deny: 0
Override 001:0800
Restrn 02:
Deny: 1
Override 001: No overrides
Restrn flt: 05
Restrn 01: 010
Deny: 010
No overrides
Restrn 02: 1
Deny: 1
No overrides
Restrn 03: 00
Deny: 00
No overrides
Restrn flt: 06
Restrn 01: <ANY>
Deny: <ANY>
No overrides
P0607114 Issue 01
27
Line restrns
Normal: 03
Night: 21
Evening: 22
Lunch: 23
Sched 4: 00
Sched 5: 00
Sched 6: 00
Remote restrns
Normal: 04
Night: 31
Evening: 32
Lunch: 33
Sched 4: 00
Sched 5: 00
Sched 6: 00
Services
Ringing service
Ringing groups (01-20)
Show group:_
Ring grp: 01
Show extension:_
221: Assigned, all others: Unassign
Sched:Night
Service: Manual, Auto, Off
Trunk answer: Y
ExtraDial: 221
Line settings
Show line:_
Ring grp: 0 (0 to 20)
Aux. ringer: Y
Sched: Evening
Sched: Lunch
Sched: Sched 4
Sched: Sched 5
Sched: Sched 6
Restrn service
Sched: Night
Service: Manual, Auto, Off
Sched: Evening
Sched: Lunch
Sched: Sched 4
Sched: Sched 5
Sched: Sched 6
Routing service
Routes (000-200)
Show route:_
DialOut: No numbr (Max.24 digits)
Use: Pool A, Pool B, Pool C
Dest codes
Show DstCode:_
Normal: 000
AbsorbLength: All
Night: None
Evening: None
Lunch: None
Sched 4: None
Sched 5: None
Sched 6: None
Sched: Night
Service: Manual, Auto, Off
Overflow: N
Sched: Evening
Sched: Lunch
Sched: Sched 4
Sched: Sched 5
Sched: Sched 6
Common settings
Control extns
For lines
Show line:_
L001: 221
For extns
Show extn#:_
221: 221
P0607114 Issue 01
Schedule names
Sched 1: Night
Sched 2: Evening
Sched 3: Lunch
Sched 4: Sched 4
Sched 5: Sched 5
Sched 6: Sched 6
Schedule times
Monday
Sched: Night
Start time: 23:00
Stop time: 07:00
Sched:Evening
Sched: Lunch
Sched: Sched 4
Sched: Sched 5
Sched: Sched 6
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Sys speed dial
Speed dial #: (Max. 24 digits)
XXX: No Number, <extrn extn>
if extrn extn entered: Use prime line, Use line, Pool code, Use
routing tabl
Display digits: Y
if Display digits=N) Name: Sys Spd Dial XXX, <name>
Bypass restr'n: N
Passwords
COS pswds
Show pswd #:_ (00-99)
COS pswd # 00
Pswd 00: None
User flt: None (00 to 99)
Line flt: None (00 to 99)
Remote pkg: None (00 to 15)
Call log pswds
Show extn#:_
Log pswd: None
Progrming pswds
Installer: 266344 (CONFIG)
SysAdmin+: 727587 (SAPLUS)
Sys admin: 23646 (ADMIN)
Basic: 22742 (BASIC)
Hospitality
Desk pswd: 4677 (HOSP)
Cond: None
Time&Date
Hour: 01
Minutes: 00
Year: 01
Month: 01
Day: 01
System prgrming
Hunt groups
Show grp:_
HGn:<DN>
Members
01:<extn>...
Appr only, Appr&Ring, Ring only
Line assignment
Show line:_
Lnnn: Unassigned, Assigned
Mode: Sequential, Cyclic, Broadcast
Hunt delay: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
If busy: busyTone, overflow, queue
Q Timeout: 15, 30, 45, 60, 120, 180
Overflow:_ <extension>
Name: HGn, _<7 characters>
Aux ringer: N
Dstnct ring: None (2, 3, 4)
Change extns
Old extn:_ (Max. 7 digits)
New extn:_ (Max. 7 digits)
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
28
Featr settings
Backgrnd music: N
On hold: Tones, Music, Silence
Receiver volume: Use sys volume, Use extn volume
Camp timeout: 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180
Park timeout: 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 300, 600
Park Mode: Lowest, Cycle
Trnsfr callbk: Y
Trnsfr callbk: 3, 4, 5, 6, 12
Network callbk: 15, 30, 45, 60, 90
DRT to prime: Y
DRT delay: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6
EX-EX Trf/Conf: Y
Held reminder: Y
Remind delay: 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180
Confrence tone: Y
Directd pickup: Y
Page tone: Y
PageTimeout: 15, 30, 60, 120, 180, 300, 600, 2700
AutoTime&Date: Y
SWCA Cntrls
Auto Associate: N
Invoke by Hold: N
Call log space
Reset all logs?
Host delay: 1000 (1000 to 7000 in 500 ms increments)
AlarmExtn: 221
Extn relocation: N
Exch ring: Preset, Echo
Msg reply enh: N
Ans.Extn: Basic, Enhanced, Extended
CLID match: 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, None
Direct-dial
D-Dial 1: Intrnl, Extrnl, None
Intrnl#: 221, Extrnl#: None
Auto Attendant
Auto attend: Off, On
Attd extn: 221
System Answer
After: 3 rings (2 to 12)
CCR
After: 3 rings (2 to 12)
CCR lines
L001: Answer: No, Yes
CCR groups
Show group:_
CCR grp 1
Show DN:_
221: Unassgnd, Assigned
Remote access
Rem access pkgs (00 to 15)
Show pkg:_
LinePool access
Pool A: (9) N
Remote page: N
Remote admin: N
Remote monitor: N
Rem line access
Show line:_
L001: Rem pkg: 00
IRAD
Answer line: None
After: 5 ring (1 to 12)
Rec’d # lengths
Private length: 3 (1-7)
Public length: 3 (1-7)
Extn # length: 3
Intrl modem: Fast, Slow
Alarm reporting
Auto-report: Off, On
Phone #1: None
Phone #2: None
Use line: None
Retry time: 15
Num. retries: 5 (0 to 9)
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Hospitality
Room / desk info
Show extn:__
Room #:_
Adm pwd req’d: Y
Call restrns
Vacant: 00
Use fit:
Base: 00
Mid: 00
Full: 00
Service time
Hour: 00
Minutes: 00
Alarm
Attn attempts: 3
Retry intrvl: 3
Attn duration: 15
Time format: 12hr, 24hr
Expired Alarms
Notify extn: None
Use tone: N
Network Services
ETSI
Network Diversion: N
MCID: N
Software Keys
SysID (8 digits)
Password keys
Key 1 (8 digits)
Key 2 (8 digits)
Key 3 (8 digits)
Maintenance
System version
Clear lines
Sys admin log
Usage Metrics
Hunt groups
Show group:_
HG <n> metrics
Clear
Time&Date of last clear
TotalCalls: nnnnn
Ans: nnnnn=nnn%
Avg ans: nn sec
Abndn: nnnnn=nnn%
Busy: nnnnn=nnn%
Ovrfl: nnnnn=nnn%
Avg: Q nnn sec
P0607114 Issue 01
29
Using passwords
Programming access is controlled by four passwords.
• Installer password—allows you to see and change any item in
programming.
• System Administrator Plus password—provides
knowledgeable users with access to all but a few sensitive
areas of programming.
• Administrator password—used to view and change the
settings that are part of day-to-day administration of the
Norstar system.
• Basic password—only used with a limited number of feature
codes to change programming and control system services.
The following tables show the items that can be programmed
when using the System Administrator Plus password or the
Administrator password. The IRAD password will appear only if
BT has authorised its use after making a remote access (RACE)
connection and changing the default IRAD password.
Programming using the SAPLUS password
Terminals&Extns
Line access
Capabilities
Name
User Prefernces
Restrictions
Call Services
Lines
Name
Restrictions
Services
Ringing service
Restrn service
Routing service
Common settings
Sys speed dial
Passwords
COS pswds
Call Log pswds
Progrming pswds
Hospitality pswds
Time&Date
System prgrming
Hunt groups
Featr settings
Direct-dial
Auto Attendant
Remote access
Hospitality
Software Keys
SysID
Password keys
Maintenance
System version
Clear lines
Sys admin log
Remote montr
Usage Metrics
Programming using the Administrator password
Terminals&Extns
Capabilities
Name
User Prefernces
Restrictions (Extn only)
Call Services
P0607114 Issue 01
Lines
Name
Services
Ringing service
Restrn service
Routing service
Sys speed dial
Passwords
Call Log pswds
Progrming pswds
Time&Date
System prgrming
Auto Attendant
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
30
Entering programming using the SAPLUS password
The staff person who is in charge of making changes to the
Compact Plus system is called the system administrator.
The System Administrator Plus password allows the
administrator to access all the settings for Administration
programming, plus a few installer settings that may have to be
changed infrequently. All procedures in this guide indicate
whether you need to use the System Administrator Plus or the
Administrator password.
The default System Administrator Plus password is
‡¤‡fi°‡, which spells SAPLUS on the keypad.
1. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG).
The display shows Password :.
2. Enter ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns. Three triangular indicators º appear on
the vertical display between the rows of keys.
3. Place the programming overlay over the keys pointed to by
the indicators º.
Entering programming using the Administrator password
The Administrator password is your key to Administration
programming. Most of the programming in this guide can be
entered with the Administrator password.
The default Administrator password is ¤‹fl›fl, which
spells ADMIN on the telephone keypad.
Entering programming using the Basic password
The Basic password allows you to do day-to-day maintenance of
individual telephones without allowing access to sensitive
programming.
The default Basic password is ¤¤‡›¤, which spells
BASIC on the telephone keypad.
You do not enter Basic programming using ¤flfl‹››
(CONFIG). Instead, you enter the Feature code that you want to
program, followed by ¤¤‡›¤ (BASIC). For example:
1. Press ≤••, followed by the code.
2. Enter ¤¤‡›¤ (BASIC).
3. Follow the instructions on the display and make your
selections using the display keys.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
31
The following feature codes can be accessed using the Basic
password:
• ≤••°‡‹‡ (USER) — User preferences settings
allow you to programme telephone model, key assignment,
User speed dial, Call log options, Dialling options, Language,
Display contrast, and Ring type.
• ≤••°›fl‹ (TIME) — Time and Date settings
let you change any of the settings for hour, minutes, seconds,
year, month, and day.
Programmable settings and features
Compact Plus has several features to assist you in assuring that
calls do not go unanswered or do not get lost. For example,
extensions can be programmed to provide back-up answering for
other extensions or lines. You can also create an attendant
position to provide answering for a group of extensions.
You can forward calls that are unanswered, pick up calls for other
extensions, redirect selected lines to telephones inside or outside
your business, and have calls answered from any extension
during non-business or off-peak hours.
Many call capture features are pre-configured with your Compact
Plus system. Others, however, must be programmed in order to
take full advantage of their flexibility.
The following programming settings are used to enhance
answering and handling calls:.
Do Not Disturb on busy
Call Forward all calls
Forward on Busy
Call Pickup Directed
Forward No Answer
Call Pickup Group
Hunt groups
Callback
Pickup Group
Call Queuing
Prime extension
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Prime line
Line redirection
Redirect Ring
Transfer
Trunk Answer
System-wide call appearance
(SWCA)
Answer extension
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
32
Do Not Disturb (DND) on Busy
When this setting is turned on, you do not hear any ringing if a
second call arrives while you are talking on the telephone. If you
want to know when a second call arrives, turn this setting off.
For example, Mr. Forbes dislikes having his telephone ring when
he is on a call. Therefore, he uses the DND on Busy feature so that
additional calls are diverted to the Prime extension until he has
finished his current call. If your telephone is a Prime extension
for any line, do not use the DND on Busy feature.
If an extension is a member of a hunt group and the extension
activates this feature, the extension will not receive notification
of incoming hunt group calls while on a call.
See "Programming Do Not Disturb on Busy" on page 101.
Forward on Busy
When you already have a call, ensure that other calls to your
extension are answered. Forward the additional calls to an
extension that you know will be monitored.
For example, Miss Vale works with Mr. Cassidy as a team. They
answer each other’s calls. Forward on Busy is set for the
extension of the other person. When Mr. Cassidy is busy on a call,
other calls to his extension are forwarded immediately to Miss
Vale.
If your extension is a member of a hunt group, the Call Forward
on Busy setting is overridden by the hunt group routing.
See "Setting Call Forward no answer" on page 98.
Forward No Answer
When you are away from your telephone, ensure that calls are
answered by forwarding to an extension that you know will be
monitored.
For example, Miss Vale works with Mr. Cassidy as a team. They
make sure that one of them is always in the office. Forward No
Answer is set for the team-mate’s extension. When Miss Vale is
away from her telephone, calls are forwarded immediately to Mr.
Cassidy.
If your extension is a member of a hunt group, the Call Forward
No Answer setting is overridden by the hunt group routing.
See "Setting Call Forward no answer" on page 98.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
33
Hunt groups
Establish hunt groups in your system to allow external and
internal callers to reach a group of extensions by calling a single
directory number. The hunt groups feature ensures calls are easily
routed to the appropriate people. You can programme the
members for a group, member position within a group, how calls
are distributed, how long is spent looking for available agents,
and what happens if all agents are busy.
For example, your company has five sales people available to
field calls from clients. Bob is your most experienced sales
person and you would like him to receive incoming calls first.
You would set up a Hunt Group with these five extensions as
members, programme Bob’s extension as the first member in the
group, set the distribution mode to sequential so Bob receives
incoming calls first, and name this group SALES.
See "Programming Hunt groups" on page 119.
Pickup group
Assign extensions to one of nine Pickup groups for maximum call
coverage. This ensures that extensions in a group can answer calls
for any other extension in that group.
For example, Mr. Forbes and Ms. Smith both belong to Pickup
group 3. When Mr. Forbes is away from his extension, Ms. Smith
presses ≤‡fi on her own extension to answer Mr. Forbes’
calls.
A hunt group call ringing at an extension that is a member of a
hunt group can be picked up by any extension in that Call Pickup
Group.
See "Assigning a Pickup group" on page 104.
Prime extension
The Compact Plus system automatically assigns extension 221 as
the Prime extension for each exchange line. Your system installer
can change the extension number in Lines programming. The
Prime extension can be programmed to receive unanswered calls
through Delayed Ring Transfer, Held Line Reminders and Do
Not Disturb transfers.
In a busy office, the receptionist or secretary extension may be
designated as the Prime extension.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
34
Prime line for an extension
A line can be assigned to a telephone as its primary line to use
when making an outgoing call. This feature saves the user time
because the system automatically selects the line rather than the
user having to select the line.
See "Assigning a Prime line to an extension" on page 42.
Redirect ring
When this feature is turned on, the telephone gives an audible
signal whenever a call has been redirected. This reminds you that
a line has been redirected using the Line redirection feature and
serves as a cue to turn the feature off.
For example, you have re-directed line 1 to another extension in
the network. If Redirect ring is on, you hear a short ring every
time a call on line 1 is forwarded to the other telephone.
See "Activating Redirect ring" on page 109.
Trunk answer
This feature is active by default for all Service modes. This means
that during non-business or non-busy times, any extension can
answer calls ringing at any other extension. It does not matter
which lines appear on the extensions. It only matters that the line
itself has been placed in a Service mode using its Control
extension.
For example, during the lunch break between 11:30 a.m. and 1:00
p.m., lines 1, 2, and 3 are put in Lunch mode. Trunk answer is
active, so whenever any extension rings, Mr. Cassidy, who acts as
a temporary attendant, can answer from his extension.
See "Using alternate or scheduled services" on page 158.
Answer extension
If your telephone has an Answer key for another extension, you
can answer calls that come in for that extension on your
telephone.
For example, Mr. Cassidy’s telephone has an Answer key for
Miss Vale. When Miss Vale’s telephone rings, Mr. Cassidy can
answer it on his telephone by pressing the Answer key. Miss
Vale’s extension has been assigned as an Answer extension on
Mr. Cassidy’s telephone.
Simply press the Answer key when you hear the other person’s
telephone ringing.
See "Answer keys" on page 242.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
35
Call Forward all calls
If you know you are going to be away from your telephone for a
while, forward your calls to another extension. Otherwise the
callers must wait for the Forward No Answer feature to
automatically transfer the call after several rings.
For example, Mr. Forbes knows that most client calls arrive in the
morning, but he will be in meetings until noon. He forwards his
extension to Ms. Smith, who can deal with issues right away.
Press ≤›, then the extension number that you wish to send
the calls to.
If your extension is a member of a hunt group, the Call Forward
all calls setting is overridden by the hunt group routing.
See "Forwarding all calls" on page 274.
Call Pickup Directed
If any telephone is ringing in your office, you can answer it from
your extension.
For example, only a few people are in the office early in the
morning. When Miss Vale’s telephone rings, Mr. Forbes takes the
call using Call Pickup Directed.
Press ≤‡fl, then dial the extension of the telephone that is
ringing.
See "Answering a telephone using Pickup Group" on page 241.
Call Pickup Group
If your telephone is part of a Pickup Group, you can answer calls
ringing on any telephone in the same group.
For example, Mr. Forbes and Ms. Smith both belong to Pickup
Group 3. When Mr. Forbes is away from his telephone, Ms. Smith
uses the Call Pickup Group feature on her own extension to
answer Mr. Forbes’ calls.
Press ≤‡fi.
See "Answering a telephone using Pickup Group" on page 241.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
36
Call Queuing
When more than one call is ringing at your telephone, you can
ensure you answer the calls in the order they arrive.
For example, Mr. Cassidy notices that he has calls on Line 3 and
on line 4. He does not know which call arrived first, so he uses
Call Queuing to answer.
Press ≤°‚⁄.
See "Answering the next queued call" on page 235.
Do Not Disturb
If you do not want to be interrupted by any telephone calls, turn
on the Do Not Disturb feature so that calls are immediately
transferred to the Prime extension.
For example, Mr. Moore is having a performance review meeting
with the president of the company. Mr. Moore turns on Do Not
Disturb before the meeting so that all calls are routed to the
attendant.
Press ≤°fi.
A hunt group extension can temporarily leave the hunt group by
activating this feature.
See "Do Not Disturb" on page 230.
Line redirection
You can use the Line redirection feature to redirect the calls
coming in on your external lines to a telephone outside the office.
You can redirect exchange lines to AC15A private circuits, and
you can redirect AC15A private circuits to either exchange lines
or private circuits, and you can redirect one exchange line to
another.
You may choose to redirect all your external lines or only some
of them. For example, you generally receive personal calls on
Line 1 and customer calls on Line 2. You can redirect Line 2 to a
colleague when you are busy, but still accept personal calls on
line 1.
Press ≤°›, then follow the prompts on your display.
See "Line redirection" on page 276.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
37
Ring Again
You can have the Norstar system notify you when an extension is
either not busy or has just been used. This feature enables you to
reach the person on that extension.
For example, Miss Vale has an urgent request for Mr. Moore.
When she dials his extension, it is busy. She uses the Ring Again
feature to monitor the line. As soon as Mr. Moore hangs up, Miss
Vale’s telephone rings to let her know that she can try her call
again.
Dial the extension number, press ≤¤, then hang up.
See "Using Ring Again" on page 284.
Transfer
If you are an attendant, or if a call should be routed to someone
else, you can do it easily with Compact Plus. For example, a
client calls Mr. Forbes. Mr. Forbes realises that it would be better
for the client to speak to Ms. Smith, so he transfers the call to Ms.
Smith’s extension. When Ms. Smith answers, Mr. Forbes
explains the situation briefly and then hangs up. The client
remains on the line with Ms. Smith.
Press ≤‡‚, dial the number, then hang up.
See "Transferring a call" on page 253.
SWCA keys
System-wide call appearance keys allow anyone in the system to
pick up a parked call by entering the feature code that was used
to park the call, which can be any one of these 16 codes:
≤•fi¤‚ to ≤•fi‹fi.
You can also assign a number of these codes to memory buttons
with indicators to any group of telephones. In which case, calls
can be parked on the memory buttons and are visible and can be
retrieved at other extensions by pressing the corresponding
button.
See "Setting SWCA controls" on page 143.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
38
Making suggestions
Please submit your comments and suggestions to
British Telecommunications
Norstar Product Manager
Weston House
246 High Holborn
London
WC1V 7DQ
U.K.
Advice Line
If you have difficulty programming or using a system feature,
refer to the description of the feature, and follow the appropriate
procedures. If you still have difficulty, call the Advice Line at
0800 378822.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming Terminals and
Extensions
• Terminals and extensions.........40
• Assigning a line to an extension (line access).........40
• Assigning line pool access.........42
• Assigning a Prime line to an extension.........42
• Assigning intercom keys to an extension.........43
• Assigning an Answer key to an extension.........44
• Setting the Originating Line Identification for an extension.........45
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
40 Programming Terminals and Extensions
Terminals and extensions
Terminals&Extns allows you to assign settings to each telephone.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn (nnn represents the
three-digit extension number).
Assigning a line to an extension (line access)
Line access allows you to assign lines to individual extensions.
When you are finished programming line access settings for one
extension, you can copy those settings to other extensions by
using COPY at the Line Access display. For more information
about copying extension programming, see "Copying
programming for telephones" on page 147.
Line Assignment
This setting allows you to assign physical lines and Direct Inward
Access (DIA) lines to each extension. DIA lines are assigned and
removed in the same manner as other lines.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠ three times. The display shows Show line:.
7. Enter the line number. The display shows Lnnn:Unassigned.
8. Press SCAN to see the setting and then press SCAN again to
view the lines assigned to this extension.
9. Press CHANGE to change the setting for each line: Appr&Ring,
Appr only, Unassigned, or Ring only.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming Terminals and Extensions 41
10. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
In general, exchange lines are not assigned to telephones. If
assigned, they are used for monitoring incoming call usage or for
making outgoing calls.
You cannot assign a line that is private to another telephone.
Each line assigned to appear at a telephone must appear at a key
with an indicator on that extension.
If you set a line to Ring only, incoming calls appear on an
intercom key.
A Central Answering Position (CAPN/CAP) telephone with a
CAPN module (M7324) or KIM (T7316E) can provide extra line
keys.
The M7100N/T7100 and M7000/T7000 telephones are
exceptions. They have no line keys and can be assigned any
number of lines.
Ensure that the lines assigned to M7100N/T7100 and
M7000/T7000 telephones are assigned to ring so that you can
detect incoming calls on the lines.
Number of appearances
This setting allows you to assign the number of appearances of a
DIA line (lines 101 to 140) allowed on an extension. In order to
programme the number of appearances, the line assignment value
must not be Unassigned. The default setting is 1.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠ three times. The display shows Show line:.
7. Press ‘. The display shows Lnnn: and the line
assignment.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Appearances:1. This
prompt does not appear if the line is unassigned.
9. Press CHANGE and enter a numeric value from 1 to 255.
10. Press OK.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
42 Programming Terminals and Extensions
Assigning line pool access
Line pools allow the system to share lines among a number of
telephones, reducing line costs and the number of button
appearances on the telephones in the system.
This setting allows an extension to access one or more of the three
line pools available (A, B, or C). When you change the setting to
Yes for a line pool, the extension being programmed can access
any line in that line pool.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠ twice. The display shows Line
assignment.
7. Press ‘. The display shows LinePool access.
8. Press ≠.
9. Press CHANGE to select the setting: N (No) or Y (Yes).
10. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Assigning a Prime line to an extension
This setting assigns a Prime line to the telephone. When the
telephone is being used to make an outgoing call, the Prime line
is the first line the system selects.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠ twice. The display shows Line
assignment.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming Terminals and Extensions 43
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Prime line:.
8. Press CHANGE to select the setting: None, Pool A, or Intcm
(intercom). Only assigned lines and line pools appear.
9. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
An assigned Prime line is not associated with the assignment of a
Prime extension.
An exchange line must be assigned to the extension in Line
assignment before it can be assigned as the Prime line to the
extension.
A line pool must be assigned to the extension in line pool access
before a line pool can be assigned as the Prime line to the
extension.
By assigning a line pool as a Prime line, an extension can be made
to search automatically for an idle line in a pool.
Note: If you set Prime line to Intcm (intercom), you can still
access any line pools you have assigned to the extension.
When you enter the line pool access code, the system
searches for an idle line in that pool. When all the lines in
the pool are busy, the display shows No free lines. The
system does not search from one pool to another.
Assigning intercom keys to an extension
Intercom keys can provide an extension with access to internal
lines and line pools.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠ twice. The display shows Line
assignment.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Intercom keys:.
8. Press CHANGE to select the setting: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8.
9. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Each intercom key assigned during programming automatically
appears on the extension. The keys start with the lower right-hand
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
44 Programming Terminals and Extensions
key, or one key above, if the Handsfree/Mute feature is assigned
to the bottom right key on the extension.
An extension needs two intercom keys to establish a conference
call with two other Norstar/BST extensions.
Only one intercom key may be required if the key is only to be
used to access line pools and to make and receive internal calls.
If an extension has several lines assigned only to ring and not
appear, the arrangement works better if there are two intercom
keys.
M7100N/T7100 telephones have two default intercom keys
which cannot be changed. These keys do not appear on the
telephone.
Assigning an Answer key to an extension
Calls for other Norstar/BST telephones can appear and be
answered at the extension being programmed. The extension
numbers of the other telephones are referred to as Answer
extension numbers. You can assign up to eight Answer extension
numbers to the telephone being programmed.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠ twice. The display shows Line
assignment.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Answer extns.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
9. Enter the extension number.
10. Press CHANGE to change the setting for the Answer extension
number: Appr&Ring, Appr only, or Unassigned.
11. To assign additional Answer extension numbers, press
–, ≠, then enter the next Answer
extension number.
12. Press SCAN to view the Answer extension numbers assigned
to this extension.
13. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming Terminals and Extensions 45
Every Answer extension number assigned to the telephone
automatically assigns an Answer key with an indicator to the
telephone. These keys should be labelled accordingly, identifying
the telephone with its name or extension number.
More than one telephone can have an Answer key for the same
extension number. In this way, more than one telephone can
provide Call Alerting and Call Answering for any calls directed
to that extension number.
A private line does not generate alerting at an Answer key.
Note: You cannot assign Answer extension numbers to an
M7000/T7000, M7100N/T7100 telephones or to a singleline telephone connected to an Analogue Terminal
Adapter (ATA).
See "Answer keys" on page 242 for information on using Answer
keys.
Setting the Originating Line Identification for an
extension
Outgoing calls on a Direct Inward Access (DIA) line use an
Originating Line Identification (OLI) number, which appears on
the telephone display of the called party as part of the calling line
identification (CLID). Compact Plus allows you to programme
the OLI number for each extension. The OLI number could be the
Public Received number for the DIA line assigned to the
extensions, or it could be a different Public Received number if
you wish calls to be returned to someone else’s extension. Ensure
that the OLI numbers are in the same range as the received digits
that come from the exchange.
For example, a sales manager who uses a DIA line to call clients
may wish to have returned calls directed to an assistant. The OLI
programmed for the manager’s extension is the Public Received
number for the assistant’s extension. Thus, a client viewing the
CLID number on their telephone display sees the assistant’s
telephone number.
If the OLI number is set to None, then the CLID displayed at the
called party’s telephone is a listed extension number for your
Compact Plus system. If the programmed OLI number is outside
the allowed range, Compact Plus may insert a default number.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
46 Programming Terminals and Extensions
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠ twice. The display shows Line
assignment.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows OLI #:.
8. Press CHANGE and enter the number.
9. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming Hospitality Services
• Hospitality extensions.........48
• Alarm time (AL) feature.........49
• Hospitality Services admin alarm feature.........51
• Room occupancy (RO).........52
• Room condition (RC).........53
• Service time.........55
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
48 Programming Hospitality Services
Hospitality Services (HS) is a group of features that increases the
value of the Compact Plus system in small to medium-sized
hotels, motels or hospitals.
In a hotel setting, guests gain improved services through
immediate access to basic functions like:
• wake-up service or reminders
• accurate tracking of the room service requirements,
for example check-in/check-out).
Hospitality Services features must be activated by qualified
personnel using Software keycodes. See "Software Keys" on
page 58.
Hospitality extensions
Norstar/BST extensions are classified as one of following types
of telephones:
• Common extension: A common extension can be a telephone
found in a lobby, office, or common area. It is not associated
with a room. A common extension does not have access to all
HS features.
Common extensions are Norstar/BST extensions or analogue
telephones connected to an analogue terminal adapter (ATA)
or to an analogue extension module (AEM).
• Room extension: A Room extension is a telephone assigned
to a room in System programming. Up to five telephones can
be assigned to the same room (they all share the same room
number).
Room extension can be any Norstar/BST extension or
analogue telephone connected to an ATA or an AEM.
• Hospitality Services admin telephone: An HS admin
telephone is any two-line display telephone, such as the
T7316, T7316E, M7310N, or M7324N. An HS admin
telephone can be programmed to prompt for a Desk admin
password before access to HS admin features is granted. To
change the Desk admin password see "Hospitality passwords"
on page 174.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming Hospitality Services 49
Alarm time (AL) feature
The Alarm time feature provides an alarm clock capability on
Norstar/BST telephones and analogue telephones connected to an
ATA. Both room extensions and common extensions can be
programmed to sound an audible alert at a requested time.
One Alarm time within a 24-hour period is programmable on a
room or common extension and must be reset daily. When the
alarm sounds, all telephones in a given room alert. Cancelling the
alarm on any telephone cancels the alarm on all the telephones in
the room. A new Alarm time entered on a room or common
extension overwrites any alarm set previously.
If the Compact Plus system experiences a mains failure, the
failure can result in missed Alarm times. When the Compact Plus
system is running and the system time resets, the missed Alarm
times alert on respective room or common extensions. At all
times, the Compact Plus system allows up to a maximum of 24
extensions that can alert at the same time.
Programming the Alarm time feature
To programme the Alarm time feature on a Norstar/BST
telephone:
1. Press ≤°‡fi. The display shows Alrm: 07:00am
OFF.
2. If the alarm time is correct press ON/OFF.
The display shows Alrm:07:00am ON. Press DONE to exit.
or
To enter a new alarm time press CHG.
The display shows Enter time:.
3. Enter a new four-digit alarm time.
— If the 24-hour clock format is used (hour: 00 to 23 and
minutes: 00 to 59), no confirmation is required. The
display shows Alarm ON hh:mm.
— If the 12-hour format is used, the display shows hh:mm AM
or PM?. Press the AM or PM display key. The display shows
Alarm ON hh:mm.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
50 Programming Hospitality Services
To programme the Alarm time feature on M7000/T7000
telephones or analogue telephone:
1. Press ≤°‡fi on M7000/T7000 telephones or
press ¿•°‡fi on an analogue telephone.
A tone sounds.
2. Enter a four-digit alarm time.
— If the 24-hour clock format is used (hour: 00 to 23 and
minutes: 00 to 59), a tone sounds.
— If the 12-hour format is used, press • to select am or £
to select pm. A tone sounds.
At the selected times, telephones in the room ring to wake-up or
remind the occupant of the next event or meeting. If Music on
hold is programmed for the system the occupant will hear music
when they answer a wake-up call.
Changing or cancelling an earlier selected Alarm time
To set a new time for an Alarm time, re-enter a new Alarm time.
The new time overwrites any earlier set time. Cancelling the
Alarm time for any telephone cancels the Alarm time for all the
telephones in the same room.
Cancelling the alarm
• To cancel the Alarm time on a Business Series Terminals or
Norstar/BST telephones, press ≤£°‡fi. The display
reads Alarm off.
• To cancel the Alarm time on an analogue telephone, press
¿£°‡fi.
Turning off the Alarm
When a telephone rings at the selected time, the occupant can
release the Alarm ring as follows:
• Press any key except the ≥ key.
• On an analogue telephone lift and replace the handset back
into position.
Note: If the user presses the ≥ key when the telephone rings,
the alarm is temporarily deactivated (snooze). After a
number of minutes, the telephone will alert again. If the
user is on a call when the alarm sounds, they can press any
key except ® to cancel the alarm and maintain their
active call.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming Hospitality Services 51
Hospitality Services admin alarm feature
Only an Hospitality Services (HS) admin telephone can use the
Hospitality Services admin alarm feature. The HS admin alarm
feature is room oriented only, it does not control the alarms on
common extensions.
The Hospitality Services admin feature can:
• query the current or last alarm time set for a room
• overwrite previous Alarm time programming for a room on
the system
— assign an Alarm time for any room on the system
— change an Alarm time for any room on the system
— cancel an Alarm pending for any room on the system
To programme the Alarm time for a room with the Hospitality
Services admin alarm feature:
1. Press ≤°‡‡ on a two-line display telephone.
2. If configured, the display reads Password:. Enter the Desk
admin password.
3. The display reads Al of rm#:. Enter the room number.
4. Press VIEW. The display shows Alrm: 07:00am OFF:. If the
alarm time is correct press the ON/OFF display key to activate
the alarm.
5. Enter a four-digit alarm time.
— If the 24-hour format is used (hour: 00 to 23 and minutes:
00 to 59), no confirmation is required. The display shows
Alarm hh:mm ON.
— If the 12-hour format is used, the display shows the four
digit time plus AM or PM?. Press the AM or PM display key.
The display shows Alarm hh:mm am or pm ON.
6. Press the ® key to exit programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
52 Programming Hospitality Services
Room occupancy (RO)
The Room occupancy (RO) feature allows front desk operators to
assign dialling restrictions to room extensions. This feature also
works with the Room condition (RC) feature.
Dialling restrictions for room extensions, defined in
Restrictions under Terminals&Extns and Call restrns
under Hospitality in System prgrming, replace dialling filters
set under Services. The RO feature does not apply to common
extensions.
The RO feature uses the following room states: Vacant, Basic,
Mid, and Full. A variety of dialling filters can be configured for
each room states. The default setting is Vacant.
• Vacant
Room is empty.
• Basic
Room is occupied, and occupants can access basic
callout features.
• Mid
Room is occupied, and occupants can access basic
callout features, plus other specified features, for
instance, toll-free calling.
• Full
Room is occupied and occupants can access all call
features allowed on the system.
Programming the state of a room extension
To access the Room Occupancy feature and assign the state of a
room extension:
1. Press ≤°‡· on a two-line display telephone.
2. If configured, the display reads Password:. Enter the Desk
admin password.
3. The display reads Oc of rm#:. Enter the room number and
press OK or LIST.
4. The display reads rrrrr:Vacant. Press the CHANGE display
key and select the required status for the room extension:
Vacant, Basic, Mid or Full. The default setting is Vacant.
5. To programme other rooms, press the FIND or NEXT display
key and return to step 3. If no more rooms require
programming, press the ® key to exit programming.
Note: Programming a room to Vacant state cancels any
outstanding alarms.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming Hospitality Services 53
Room condition (RC)
The Room condition (RC) feature allows users to exchange
information about the serviced state of a room. Users are front
desk attendants, cleaning or maintenance personnel of an
establishment. The RC feature is not available from a common
extension.
The Compact Plus system maintains a database of the state of
each room. This database is accessed from either the room
extension or a Hospitality Services admin telephone.You can set
a Room Condition password to limit access to this features. See
"Room condition password" on page 175.
Room extensions can:
• set the associated room state to Service done (Srvc done)
• set the associated room state to Needs service (Needs srvc)
• query the state of the associated room on a telephone with a
display.
Hospitality Services admin telephones can:
• set any room state to Service done (Srvc done)
• set any room state to Needs service (Needs srvc)
• query the state of any room.
The system changes the state of occupied rooms to Needs service
on a daily basis at a set time as configured in the system.
Maintenance personnel programme the condition of the room to
Service done when service in the room is complete.
The front desk attendant can query or programme the condition
of a room with a Hospitality Services admin telephone. The
Compact Plus system automatically sets the status of a room to
Needs srvc, when a Room occupancy status changes from
occupied to Vacant.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
54 Programming Hospitality Services
Room condition with a room extension
To update the Room condition using a room extension:
1. Press ≤°‡fl on a digital telephone.
Press ¿•°‡fl on an analogue telephone.
2. At the prompt, enter the status of the room.
3. Press ⁄ on the dialpad to indicate Set to srv done.
If required, enter the Room condition password.
or,
Press ¤ on the dialpad to indicate Set to needs srv.
If required, enter the Room condition password.
4. On display telephones, the display reads Set to srv done or
Set to needs srv. On M7000/T7000 telephones or an
analogue telephone, replace the handset to exit.
Room condition with a Hospitality service admin
telephone
To update or query the Room condition using a Hospitality
services admin telephone:
1. Press ≤°‡° on a two-line display telephone.
2. If configured, the display reads Password:. Enter the Desk
admin password.
3. The display reads Cd of rm#:. Enter the room number and
press OK.
4. The display reads rrrrr:Vacant. Press the CHANGE display
key and select the required status for the room extension: if
the room is occupied, select Srvc done or Needs srvc; if the
room is vacant, select Vacant or Needs srvc. The default
setting is Vacant.
5. To update or query other room extensions, press the FIND or
NEXT display key and return to step 3. If there are no more
room extensions updates or queries, press the ® key to exit
programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming Hospitality Services 55
Service time
The Service time heading of programming under
Hospitality in System prgrming allows the installer or
system administrator to programme the time when occupied
rooms change state from Service done to Service required. The
Service time heading is an integral part of the Room condition
(RC) feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••Ç؈ÏÈÌ. The display reads
Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display reads System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Hospitality.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Room/desk info.
8. Press ‘ until the display shows Service time.
9. Press ≠. The display shows Hour:00.
10. Press the CHANGE display key. Enter the hour (00 to 23). If the
number is less than 13, the display shows AM. Press CHANGE
to select PM.
11. Press ‘. The display shows Minutes:00.
12. Press the CHANGE display key. Enter the minutes (00 to 59).
13. Press the ® key to exit programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
56 Programming Hospitality Services
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Software Keys
• Viewing the System ID.........58
• Software Keys.........58
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
58 Software Keys
Viewing the System ID
You can view the System ID during a programming session in
Software Keys.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Software Keys.
5. Press ≠. The display shows SysID: followed by the
unique System ID number.
6. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Software Keys
Software Keys are password numbers provided by the installer.
They are required by the system if you want to enable the Auto
Attendant.
You are given three keys (passwords), consisting of eight digits
each. These numbers are entered in the Compact Plus system
through programming using the Prime extension and the
Software Keys heading. Once the Software Keys are entered, the
system makes the corresponding capability available.
Record the passwords in the Programming Record. You need the
numbers to restore an upgraded system after a cold start.
Entering the Software Keys
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Software Keys.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Sys ID:.
6. Press ‘. The display shows Password keys.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Key 1:.
8. Enter the eight-digit password number for Key 1. Use BKSP
to make corrections. As soon as the eighth digit is entered, the
display shows Key 2:.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Software Keys 59
9. Enter the eight-digit password number for Key 2. The display
shows Key 3:.
10. Enter the eight-digit password number for Key 3.
11. Press OK. The display shows Entry successful.
12. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
60 Software Keys
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Setting System speed dial
• Setting System speed dial.........62
• Assigning a number to a System speed dial code.........62
• Selecting a line.........63
• Setting the system to display a name instead of a number.........63
• Setting the speed dial number to bypass restrictions.........65
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
62 Setting System speed dial
Setting System speed dial
Speed dial saves time by allowing you to dial frequently called
numbers using a three-digit code. For example, you can
programme telephone numbers for major suppliers or clients for
easy dialling by everyone in the office.
Speed dial codes numbered from 001 to 255 are intended for
system-wide use. Speed dial codes from 256 to 279 are for
personal use and can be programmed differently at each
extension. See "Changing a personal (user) speed dial code" on
page 113 for more information on the Speed dial feature.
The steps to programming System speed dial are:
• assign a number to a System speed dial code
• select an outgoing facility to be used for the number
• set whether the system displays the number or a name
(optional)
• set whether the speed dial number bypasses any restrictions on
the line or extension where it is used (optional).
See "Chart 1: System Speed Dial" on page 316 in Appendix A for
a programming overview.
See also "Using Speed Dial" on page 231.
Assigning a number to a System speed dial code
First, choose a three-digit speed dial code (from 001 to 255) and
then assign a telephone number to it.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Sys speed dial.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Speed dial #:.
6. Enter the System speed dial code (001 to 255).
7. Press ≠. The display shows the number currently
assigned to the code or No number.
8. Press CHANGE.
9. Enter the telephone number (up to 24 digits) and press OK.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Setting System speed dial 63
Selecting a line
After assigning a telephone number to the speed dial code, you
must select an outgoing facility for the number to use. Choose a
Prime line, an exchange line, a line pool, or the routing table.
When you programme a line pool as part of a speed dial number,
use the programme key labelled Intercom and the line pool access
code, or a programmed line pool key.
If you assign a specific line to a System speed dial number, only
extensions with an appearance of that line can use the speed dial
number.
1. Begin with the display showing the speed dial code you just
changed in the previous procedure.
2. Press ‘. The display shows Use prime line.
3. Press CHANGE to choose Use prime line, Use routing tabl, Use
line, or Pool code. Stop pressing CHANGE when you see the
line you want to use for the speed dial.
4. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Setting the system to display a name instead of a
number
You can choose to have the display show either the extension
number or a name for a speed dial code. For example, you could
programme a speed dial for a frequently used courier and have the
display show Courier instead of the courier’s telephone number.
System speed dial names can be 16 characters long. The default
displays the number.
Alpha tagging: If you specify a name for a system speed dial,
and your system is set up for CLI display, an incoming call on a
number-only CLI line that matches the system speed dial number
will display whatever name you entered into the system speed
dial name field. This is referred to as alpha tagging. You can
determine how many digits of the incoming call and the number
entered into the system speed dial must match before the system
determines that the numbers are the same. Refer to "CLID
Match" on page 144.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Sys speed dial.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
64 Setting System speed dial
5. Press ≠. The display shows Speed dial#:.
6. Enter the System speed dial code (001 to 255) you want to
use.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Display digits:.
8. Press CHANGE to choose N (No).
No means the display shows a name for the code.
9. Press ‘. The display shows Name: Sys spd di….
Press ≠ to see the rest of the display.
10. Press CHANGE. The display shows Name:.
11. Enter the name you want to give to the speed dial code.
Enter the name by pressing the appropriate key on the keypad
until the first letter of the name is displayed. Press -->, then
enter the next letter of the name and so on until the name is
complete. Up to 16 characters are allowed. Press # to add
spaces.
12. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
CLID name display
When you specify a name for a system speed dial, the system
displays the name programmed on that speed dial when you
receive a call from that number over a number-only analogue line
or target line. If you do not specify a name, then only the number
or line will appear for the call, depending on how the line was
programmed.
Note: For name display to occur, the calling number must also
match the system speed dial entry, as defined under CLID match.
Refer to "CLID Match" on page 144.
To program which display appears first on your telephone, follow
these steps:
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Line access.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Call Services.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Setting System speed dial 65
8. Press ≠. The display shows Auto Call Services.
9. Press ‘. The display shows 1stDisplay.
10. Press CHANGE until you get to Name.
11. Press OK.
Setting the speed dial number to bypass restrictions
System speed dial numbers are generally subject to any
restrictions that are programmed in the Compact Plus system, but
they can be programmed to bypass these restrictions. The default
setting is N (No), which means the number is subject to normal
call restrictions.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Sys speed dial.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Speed dial #:.
6. Enter the System speed dial code (001 to 255).
7. Press ≠. The display shows the number currently
assigned to the code, or No number.
8. Press ‘ until the display shows Bypass restr’n:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
10. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
66 Setting System speed dial
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Naming extensions and lines
• Naming extensions.........68
• Naming lines.........69
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
68 Naming extensions and lines
Naming extensions
You can personalise your office communications by assigning
names to lines and extensions in the Norstar system. The
extension default name is the extension number (for example,
Extn 221). The line default name is the line number (for example,
Line 001).
Names can be seven characters long. Line and extension names
can contain both letters and numbers, but not # and *. To avoid
confusion, do not assign the same name to two extensions, two
lines, or to both an extension and a line in your system. Use
creative combinations of initials, abbreviations, or even
nicknames, to give each extension a unique name.
As the administrator, you can programme the system so that,
when you enter an internal extension number, the person’s name
appears on your telephone display. At the same time, the person
you are calling sees your name on their display.
See ‘Chart 2: Naming extensions’ on page 316 in Appendix A for
a programming overview.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Line access.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Name:.
8. Press CHANGE.
9. Enter the characters of the name using the key pad by
pressing --> after each letter or press ‘ to restore
the default name.
10. Press ‘ to store the name.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Naming extensions and lines 69
Naming lines
Assigning names to lines can help you identify incoming calls.
For example, if both the Sales line and the Service line ring at
your extension, your display shows which line the call is on,
Sales or Service, when the line key is pressed or the handset is
lifted.
If the Sales department is in a meeting and they forward their
lines to your extension, the telephone display shows Sales for
any incoming calls on their lines.
See ‘Chart 3: Naming lines’ on page 317 in Appendix A, for a
programming overview.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘. The display shows Lines.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Show line:.
6. Enter the line number. Press ≠. The display shows
the current name.
7. Press CHANGE.
8. Enter the characters of the name using the keypad or press
‘ to restore the default name.
9. Press ‘ to store the name.
10. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
70 Naming extensions and lines
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Changing the time and date
• Changing the time and date.........72
• Changing the time.........72
• Changing the date.........73
• Changing the time and date using the Basic password.........73
• Changing the time by an hour.........74
• Automatic Time & Date.........74
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
72 Changing the time and date
Changing the time and date
The current time and date appear on the display of idle
Norstar/Business Series Terminal (BST) telephones. Telephones
connected to an Analogue Terminal Adapter cannot display the
time and date. Whenever the mains is interrupted, the time is lost
on the clock and needs
reprogramming.
Note: You need only change the time and date at one
Norstar/BST telephone. The clock is reset for the entire
system.
The clock also controls the schedules used for services such as
ringing and routing.
After a power failure, the clock is behind by the length of time
power was lost. For example, if the power is out for two minutes,
the clock is two minutes behind.
See ‘Chart 4: Time and Date’ on page 317 in Appendix A for a
programming overview.
Changing the time
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘until the display shows Time&Date.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hour:.
6. Press CHANGE (or NEXT if you do not need to change the hour).
7. Enter the hour (00 to 23). If the number is less than 13, the
display shows AM. Press CHANGE to select PM.
8. Press ‘. The display shows Minutes:.
9. Press CHANGE.
10. Enter the minutes (00 to 59).
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Changing the time and date 73
Changing the date
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Time&Date.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hour:.
6. Press ‘ twice. The display shows Year:.
7. Press CHANGE.
8. Enter the last two digits of the current year.
9. Press ‘. The display shows Month:.
10. Enter the month (01 to 12).
11. Press ‘. The display shows Day:.
12. Press CHANGE.
13. Enter the day of the month (01 to 31).
14. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Changing the time and date using the Basic password
You can change the time and date using ≤••°›fl‹
(TIME) and the Basic password.
1. Press ≤••°›fl‹ (TIME). The display shows
Password :.
2. Press ≤••¤¤‡›¤ (BASIC). The display
shows Hour:.
3. Press CHANGE (or NEXT if you do not need to change the hour).
4. Enter the hour (00 to 23). If the number is less than 13, the
display shows AM. Press CHANGE to select PM.
5. Press NEXT. The display shows Minutes:.
6. Press CHANGE (or NEXT if you do not need to change the
minutes).
7. Enter the minutes (00 to 59).
8. Press NEXT. The display shows Year:.
9. Press CHANGE (or NEXT if you do not need to change the year).
10. Enter the last two digits of the current year.
11. Press NEXT. The display shows Month:.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
74 Changing the time and date
12. Press CHANGE (or NEXT if there is no change).
13. Enter the month (01 to 12).
14. Press NEXT. The display shows Day:.
15. Press CHANGE.
16. Enter the day of the month (01 to 31).
17. Press ® to exit.
Changing the time by an hour
Norstar offers two features that allow you to adjust the time
quickly for changes in British Standard Time.
Moving one hour forward with ** FWD
1. Press ≤••‹·‹ (FWD). The display shows
Forward by 1Hr?.
2. Press YES. The display briefly shows Time Changed.
Moving one hour backward with ** BACK
1. Press ≤••¤¤¤fi (BACK). The display shows
Backward by 1Hr?.
2. Press YES. The display briefly shows Time Changed.
Automatic Time & Date
When a Basic Rate Interface (BRI) outgoing call is answered, the
network may provide time and date information to the Norstar
system. The Auto Time&Date feature enables the Norstar system
to use this information to automatically update the time and date
on the Norstar system.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ‘. The display shows Featr settings.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Backgrnd music:.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows AutoTime&Date.
8. Press CHANGE to choose Y or N.
9. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Assigning a Direct-Dial extension
• Programming Direct-Dial.........76
• Programming an internal Direct-Dial extension.........76
• Programming an external Direct-Dial extension.........77
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
76 Assigning a Direct-Dial extension
Programming Direct-Dial
Direct-Dial allows you to dial a designated telephone in your
Compact Plus system or private network with a single digit. The
Direct-Dial digit is the digit you dial to reach an attendant in your
office. You can have one Direct-Dial extension in your Norstar
system. A person whose telephone is a Direct-Dial extension is
usually a receptionist for your entire office or for a particular
department.
The Direct-Dial telephone can send up to 30 messages and can
invoke services to activate the extra-dial telephone.
You can forward calls to a Direct-Dial telephone that is outside
your Modular Plus system if the Direct-Dial configuration is set
to use a routing table or a prime line, where the prime line is set
to Intercom. An example of this, is one of your direct-dial
telephones is configured on another system that is part of a
private network. Even though the telephone is on the private
network, the system considers it an external telephone.
Note that ISDN terminals cannot use the Direct-Dial digit to
reach a Direct-Dial extension.
For information on which telephones can access the Direct-Dial
extension, see ‘Assigning telephones to the Direct-Dial
extension’ on page 106.
See ‘Chart 5: Direct-Dial’ on page 318 in Appendix A for a
programming overview.
See ‘Accessing a Direct-Dial extension’ on page 266 for
information on using the Direct-Dial feature.
Programming an internal Direct-Dial extension
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘. until the display shows Direct-dial.
7. Press ≠. The display shows D-Dial1:Intrnl.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Intrnl #:.
9. Press CHANGE.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Assigning a Direct-Dial extension 77
10. Enter the extension number.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Programming an external Direct-Dial extension
When you assign an external number as the Direct-Dial
extension, you must also specify whether to use a Prime line,
exchange line, line pool, or routing table to place the call.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘. until the display shows Direct-dial.
7. Press ≠. The display shows D-Dial1:Intrnl.
8. Press CHANGE to switch to Extrnl.
9. Press ≠. The display shows Extrnl#:.
Note: If the direct-dial telephone is on another system in a
private network, it is still considered an external number by
the system. Use the private network dialing string for that
extension in this field.
10. Press CHANGE, then enter up to 24 digits for the external
number.
11. Press OK. The display shows the number you have entered.
12. Press ‘. The display shows the facility.
13. Press CHANGE until the display shows the facility you want.
Options are: Use prime line, Use line, Pool code, or
Use routing tabl.
ATTENTION!
If you want to be able to forward calls to an external directdial telephone, the facility needs to be set to use the routing
table or a prime line, where the prime line is set to Intercom.
14. If you choose Use line or Pool code, you must enter a line
number or pool code. If you choose Use routing tabl, you
must enter a destination code.
15. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
78 Assigning a Direct-Dial extension
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Barring calls and privileges
(Restrictions)
• Using restriction filters to bar calls.........80
• Assigning filters to a telephone (Extn restrns).........83
• Assigning filters to a line (Line restrns).........84
• Assigning filters to a line/extension (Line/extn restrns).........85
• Class of Service passwords.........86
• Assigning a remote access filter.........89
• Locking an extension.........93
• Preventing Last Number Redial.........94
• Preventing Saved Number Redial.........94
• Preventing Recall.........95
• Preventing Redirect.........96
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
80 Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions)
Using restriction filters to bar calls
Restrictions are digits that the system does not accept during
dialling. Overrides are digits that the system accepts in spite of
the restrictions. Groups of restrictions and overrides are
programmed into restriction filters.
Rather than define individual restrictions and apply them
repeatedly to each telephone and line, a restriction filter allows
you to apply restrictions as a single package of dialling sequences
that are not permitted.
Different filters can be applied to
• lines, to prevent telephones that share a line from dialling
restricted numbers
• extensions, to prevent a specific telephone from dialling
restricted numbers
• a combination of line and extension, to allow specific
telephones to be exempt from the line filter
For example, a manager and four employees share a line but
the employees have a line/extension filter that restricts the
calls they can make on that line.
• AC15A private circuits, to prevent people from using your
network to make restricted calls
The number of restriction filters that you have for your system
depends on a number of factors. You may want to have different
restrictions for different times of the day (such as barring
long-distance calls after work hours). You may want different
restrictions for a telephone that clients may use.
Default filters
You may not have to create or change a filter. Some of the more
popular filters that restrict long-distance calls exist by default.
The following table shows the default restriction filters that the
Compact Plus system provides.
Filter 01 prevents you from dialling any number that begins with
0 or 1, except when the number begins with 0-800.
Filter 05 prevents you from dialling any number that begins with
010, 1, and 00.
Filter 06 prevents you from dialling numbers that begin with any
digit.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions) 81
You may change the default filters before you apply them. For
instance, you might add override 002 to Restriction 02,
permitting calls to 1-800.
Restriction filter defaults
Filter
Restrictions (denied)
Overrides
00
No restrictions (cannot be changed)
01
01: 0
001: 0800
02: 1
02
No restrictions
03
No restrictions
04
No restrictions
05
01: 010
02: 1
03: 00
06
01: •
(the dot represents any digit)
07 - 99
No restrictions or overrides programmed
Customising a call barring filter
You can customise default filters for your needs before you apply
them. You can
• create a new restriction filter
• add or remove restrictions
• add or remove overrides
Rules for adding and creating filters
• You can have up to 100 restriction filters.
• There is a maximum of 400 restrictions and overrides
allocated to the 100 programmable filters.
• Each programmable filter can have up to 48 restrictions. There
is no limit on the number of overrides that can be allocated to
a restriction.
• You can use any restriction or override in more than one filter.
Each time it is used, it counts as one entry. For example, if
restriction 411 exists in filters 01, 02, and 03, it uses up three
of the 400 entries available.
• The maximum length of a restriction is 15 digits. The
maximum length of an override is 16 digits.
• You can use • and £ in a sequence of numbers in either a
restriction or an override. These characters are often used as
part of feature codes for other systems or for features provided
by the public switched telephone network (PSTN).
• The solid dot (•) can represent any digit. It is inserted by
pressing ANY.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
82 Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions)
• When you are finished programming restrictions for one
extension, you can copy those settings to other extensions by
using COPY at the Restrictions ˆ display. For more
information about copying extension programming, see
‘Restriction service’ on page 160.
• You cannot delete a filter but you can delete a restriction
within a filter. Removing the restrictions programmed on a
filter makes it an unrestricted filter, but the filter itself is not
removed.
Removing a restriction changes the
identifying number of the restriction.
Removing a restriction removes the
overrides associated with it, and changes
the identifying number of the restriction.
For example, removal of restriction 01 renumbers restrictions 01 to 08 as 01 to 07.
Applying restriction filters
Once you create the filters, you can assign the restrictions to a
telephone (under Terminals&Extns), to a line (under Lines), to a
particular line on a telephone (under Terminals&Extns), and to
remote callers (under Remote access).
To assign restriction filters for different times of the day, see
‘Restriction service’ on page 160.
See ‘Chart 6: Restriction filters’ on page 319 in Appendix A for
a programming overview.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Line access.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Restrictions.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Restrn filters.
9. Press ≠. The display shows Show filter:.
10. Enter the two-digit code or press ‘.
11. Press ≠.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions) 83
12. Use REMOVE, ADD, the keypad, and OK to change the
restrictions for the filter.
13. Press ≠, then ‘ to see the overrides for the
restriction.
14. Use REMOVE, ADD, the keypad, and OK to change the overrides
for the restriction.
15. Press ® to quit or ‘ to continue programming.
Assigning filters to a telephone (Extn restrns)
Extension restrictions allows you to assign a restriction filter to a
telephone to prevent certain numbers from being dialled from
that telephone. You can assign a different restriction filter for
normal service and for each of six schedules.
See ‘Using alternate or scheduled services’ on page 158 for more
information about the schedules.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Line access.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Restrictions.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Restrn filters.
9. Press ‘. The display shows Extn restrns.
10. Press ≠. The display shows Filters.
11. Press ≠. The display shows Normal:.
12. Press CHANGE and use the keypad to enter the number of the
restriction filter to be assigned to the extension for each
schedule.
13. Press ® to quit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
84 Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions)
The following table shows the default restrictions.
Default filters for extensions
Schedule
Restriction filter
Normal
02
Sched 1 (Night)
11
Sched 2 (Evening)
12
Sched 3 (Lunch)
13
Sched 4
00
Sched 5
00
Sched 6
00
This means, for example, that if you enter a set of restrictions for
filter 11, they are automatically applied when the Night schedule
is in use.
Assigning filters to a line (Line restrns)
Line restrictions allows you to assign a restriction filter to a line
to prevent certain numbers from being dialled from any telephone
with that line appearance. You can assign a different restriction
filter for normal service and for each of six schedules. See ‘Using
alternate or scheduled services’ on page 158 for more
information about the schedules.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘. The displays shows Lines.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Show line:.
6. Enter the line number.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Name:.
8. Press ‘ until the display shows Restrictions.
9. Press ≠. The display shows Restrn filters.
10. Press ‘. The display shows Line restrns.
11. Press ≠. The display shows Normal:.
12. Press CHANGE and use the keypad to enter the number of the
restriction filter to be assigned to the line for each schedule.
13. Press ® to quit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions) 85
The following table shows the default restrictions.
Default filters for extensions
Schedule
Restriction filter
Normal
03
Sched 1 (Night)
21
Sched 2 (Evening)
22
Sched 3 (Lunch)
23
Sched 4
00
Sched 5
00
Sched 6
00
This means, for example, that if you enter a set of restrictions for
filter 21, they are automatically applied when the Night schedule
is in use.
Assigning filters to a line/extension
(Line/extn restrns)
Line/extension restrictions allows you to assign a restriction filter
to a specific line that can be used for outgoing calls at a specific
telephone. This type of filter replaces any line or extension
restriction filters that might otherwise apply. It restricts the
numbers you can dial on a line, but only from that telephone. The
same line on another telephone can have different restrictions.
As with extension restrictions, you can apply a different line or
extension restriction for normal service and for each of six
schedules. A maximum of 255 line/extension restrictions may be
applied to lines at telephones.
If a line/extension restriction is assigned to a line at a particular
telephone, it overrides any line restrictions or extension
restrictions that might otherwise apply.
If no line/extension restrictions have been defined, the numbers
are checked against the extension restrictions and the line
restrictions, if either of these have been defined. The numbers
may be rejected by either restriction.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
86 Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions)
6. Press ≠. The display shows Line access.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Restrictions.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Restrn filters.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows Line/extn rstrn.
10. Press ≠. The display shows Show line:.
11. Enter the line number.
12. Press ≠. The display shows Normal:.
13. Press CHANGE and use the keypad to enter the number of the
filter to be assigned as the line/extension restriction for each
schedule. There are no default line/extension restrictions.
14. Press ® to quit or ‘ to continue programming.
Class of Service passwords
Call barring shows you how to customise and apply dialling
filters to restrict calls. You can temporarily override these filters
with a Class of Service (COS) password. The COS passwords
replace one set of filters with another to allow someone to make
calls that would otherwise be restricted, without giving them
complete freedom to make every kind of call. The COS
passwords let you define individual passwords and determine the
restriction filter and remote package associated with each.
A system can have a maximum of 100 six-digit COS passwords,
ranging from 00 to 99. Each password consists of a user filter,
which replaces the current extension or line/extension filter, and
a line filter, which replaces the current line filter.
Your COS password is in effect only for the duration of your call
and does not affect the restrictions placed on other users of the
system.
The COS passwords for a system should be determined randomly
and should be changed regularly. Employee COS passwords
should be deleted when they leave the company.
Typically, each user has a separate COS password. However,
several users can share a password or one user can have several
passwords. Users should memorise their COS passwords instead
of writing them down.
You can use COPY and the keypad to copy the restriction filters
and remote package from one COS password to another. The
COS passwords must be unique.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions) 87
Before you begin programming a COS password, make sure you
have defined the appropriate restriction filters in Restrictions
under Lines. Then check that you have created a suitable remote
package in Remote access under System prgrming.See ‘Using
Class of Service passwords’ on page 263 for information about
using this feature.
Selecting a COS password
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The display
shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Passwords.
5. Press ≠. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press ≠. The displays shows Show paswd #:.
7. Enter a two-digit password (00 to 99).
8. Press ≠. The display shows the setting for that COS
password.
9. Press CHANGE.
10. Enter a password (maximum six digits).
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Assigning user restrictions to the COS password
A COS password can be used by internal and external users;
therefore, you must assign restrictions for the user instead of for
the extension.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The display
shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Passwords.
5. Press ≠. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press ≠. The displays shows Show paswd #:.
7. Enter a two-digit password (00 to 99).
8. Press ≠. The display shows the setting for that COS
password.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
88 Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions)
9. Press ‘. The display shows User flt:.
10. Press CHANGE.
11. Enter the number for the restriction filter to be applied with
this COS password.
12. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Assigning line restrictions to the COS password
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The display
shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Passwords.
5. Press ≠. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press ≠. The displays shows Show paswd #:.
7. Enter a two-digit password (00 to 99).
8. Press ≠. The display shows the setting for that COS
password.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows Line flt:.
10. Press CHANGE.
11. Enter the number for the restriction that applies to the line
when this COS password is used.
12. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Assigning a remote package to the COS password
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Passwords.
5. Press ≠. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press ≠. The displays shows Show paswd #:.
7. Enter a two-digit password (00 to 99).
8. Press ≠. The display shows the setting for that COS
password.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows Remote pkg:.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions) 89
10. Press CHANGE.
11. Enter the number of the remote package that applies with this
COS password.
12. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Assigning a remote access filter
People on other systems in your private network can dial into
your system over AC15A private circuits or exchange lines and
make outgoing calls from your system. Therefore, you may want
to limit the numbers that can be dialled over AC15A private
circuits and exchange lines. You do this by assigning a remote
access filter to the AC15A private circuits or exchange lines.
See ‘Chart 7: Remote Access Packages’ on page 320 in Appendix
A for a programming overview.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Remote access.
7. Press ≠ twice. The display shows Show pkg:.
8. Enter a package number.
9. Press ≠. The display shows LinePool access.
10. Press ≠. The display shows Pool A:.
11. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
12. Press –.
13. Press ‘. The display shows Remote page:.
14. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
15. Press ‘. The display shows Remote admin:.
16. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
17. Press ‘. The display shows Remote monitor:.
18. Press –.
19. Press ≠. The display shows Rem access pkgs.
20. Press ‘. The display shows Rem line access.
21. Press ≠. The display shows Show line:.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
90 Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions)
22. Enter the number of the AC15A private circuit (061 or 062).
The displays shows the line number followed by Rem pkg:.
23. Press CHANGE.
24. Enter the number of the remote package that you just created.
25. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue in programming.
Setting up a new COS password
As the Administrator you set up the COS passwords. You choose
a password number, the password, and finally the user and line
filters for your new Class of Service.
If you leave the user or line filter settings at Deflt, the current
filter is retained for this Class of Service. You may assign a new
filter to either the user or line filter, or to both, depending on your
needs. You must change at least one of them, or your Class of
Service is no different from ordinary service.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Passwords.
5. Press ≠. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Show pswd #:.
7. Enter an unused password number (00 to 99). The display
shows COS pswd # followed by the number you chose.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Pswdnn: and the current
setting.
9. Press CHANGE.
10. Enter six digits for the new password.
11. Press ‘. The display shows User flt: and the
current setting.
12. If you are changing the user filter, press CHANGE. The display
shows User fltr:.
13. Enter the two-digit number of an existing dialling filter.
14. Press ‘. The display shows Line fltr: and the
current setting.
15. If you are changing the line filter, press CHANGE. The display
shows Line fltr:.
16. Enter the two-digit number of an existing dialling filter.
17. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions) 91
Changing an existing COS password
To maintain the security of a Class of Service password, it is a
good idea to change it frequently.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Passwords.
5. Press ≠. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Show pswd #:.
7. Enter the password number of the COS password you want to
change (00 to 99).
8. Press ≠. The display shows Pswd, followed by the
number you chose and the current password.
9. Press CHANGE.
10. Enter six digits for the new password.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Changing the filters assigned to an existing COS
password
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Passwords.
5. Press ≠. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Show pswd #:.
7. Enter the password number of the COS password whose filter
you want to change (00 to 99).
8. Press ≠. The display shows Pswd, followed by the
number you chose and the current password.
9. Press ‘. The display shows User flt: and the
current setting.
10. If you are changing the user filter, press CHANGE. The display
shows User fltr:.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
92 Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions)
11. Enter the two-digit number of an existing dialling filter or
leave blank to return to the default filter.
12. Press ‘. The display shows Line fltr: and the
current filter assigned.
13. If you are changing the line filter, press CHANGE. The display
shows Line fltr:.
14. Enter the two-digit number of an existing dialling filter or
leave blank to return to the default filter.
15. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Erasing an existing COS password
When a Class of Service password is no longer needed, you can
erase it.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Passwords.
5. Press ≠. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Show pswd #:.
7. Enter the password number of the COS password you want to
erase (00 to 99).
8. Press ≠. The display shows Pswd, followed by the
number you chose and current password.
9. Press CLR.
10. Press ‘.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions) 93
Locking an extension
You can limit the number of features that can be used or
programmed at a particular extension by determining a lock
condition for the extension.
The options are:
• None (default)— not locked. You can programme any system
or extension setting.
• Full—fully locked. You can programme only these settings:
display contrast, ring type, ring volume, and volume control.
• Partial—partly locked. You can programme most extension
settings. You cannot programme system settings, personal
speed dial codes, dialling mode, or memory keys; and you
cannot move line keys or enable Voice Call Deny.
Note: Do not apply extension lock to the extension you use to
programme the system. There must be at least one two-line
display telephone in the system that has extension lock set
to None, or you will not be able to programme the system.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The displays shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Line access.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Restrictions.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Restrn filters.
9. Press ‘. The display shows Extn restrns.
10. Press ≠. The display shows Filters.
11. Press ‘. The display shows ExtnLock:.
12. Press CHANGE to select None, Full, or Partial.
13. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
94 Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions)
Preventing Last Number Redial
Under some conditions, a telephone may be used by customers or
clients. You can prevent non-employees from accessing sensitive
numbers by blocking certain features at the telephone. The
default setting allows an extension to use the Last Number Redial
feature.
See ‘Chart 8: Extension restrictions’ on page 321 in Appendix A
for a programming overview.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Line access.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Restrictions.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Restrn filters.
9. Press ‘. The display shows Extn restrns.
10. Press ≠. The display shows Filters.
11. Press ‘ until the display shows Allow last no:
12. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
13. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Preventing Saved Number Redial
The default setting allows an extension to use the Saved Number
Redial feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Line access.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions) 95
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Restrictions.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Restrn filters.
9. Press ‘. The display shows Extn restrns.
10. Press ≠. The display shows Filters.
11. Press ‘ until the display shows Allow saved no:.
12. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
13. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Preventing Recall
The default setting allows an extension to use the Recall feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Line access.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Restrictions.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Restrn filters.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows Extn restrns.
10. Press ≠.The display shows Filters.
11. Press ‘ until the display shows Allow recall:.
12. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
13. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
96 Barring calls and privileges (Restrictions)
Preventing Redirect
The default setting allows an extension to use the Redirect
feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The display
shows Password :.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Line access.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Restrictions.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Restrn filters.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows Extn restrns.
10. Press ≠. The display shows Filters.
11. Press ‘ until the display shows Allow redirect:.
12. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
13. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming capabilities
• Programming an extension.........98
• Setting Call Forward no answer.........98
• Setting Call Forward on Busy.........100
• Programming Do Not Disturb on Busy.........101
• Programming Handsfree.........102
• Programming Handsfree answerback.........103
• Assigning a Pickup group.........104
• Assigning a page zone.........104
• Programming paging.........105
• Assigning telephones to the Direct-Dial extension.........106
• Allowing Priority call.........107
• Assigning a Hotline.........108
• Auxiliary ringer.........109
• Activating Redirect ring.........109
• Receive tones.........110
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
98 Programming capabilities
Programming an extension
Many features that can be used at individual extensions (see
‘Appendix A: Programming overviews’ on page 313) must first
be programmed for use. As the Administrator, you can
• programme Full and Automatic Handsfree
• assign Pickup Groups to allow colleagues to easily answer
calls ringing at a telephone other than their own
• assign page zones so that colleagues can page within their
groups without disturbing the whole office
• programme an auxiliary ringer (loud bell) that alerts you when
there are incoming calls to an extension
• assign a Direct-Dial extension so your colleagues can reach an
attendant by dialling just one digit
• set Call Forward so that all calls are answered when people’s
telephones are busy or unanswered
• programme Do Not Disturb on Busy
• activate Redirect Ring
• assign a Hotline extension to call one number automatically
• allow Priority call
See ‘Chart 9: Extension capabilities 1’ on page 322 in Appendix
A for a programming overview.
Setting Call Forward no answer
When you set the system up to forward calls that are not answered
at a particular telephone, you must define the extension that the
calls are sent to and the number of times that an incoming call
rings before the call is forwarded. You can choose 2, 3, 4, 6, and
10 rings. The default is 4 rings.
Note: If the extension that you are forwarding calls to does not
have a free intercom key, or has Do Not Disturb or Do Not
Disturb on busy activated, the incoming call continues to
visually alert at your telephone, and the caller continues to
hear ringback.
If this is not desirable, you can programme a Call Forward
on Busy or Call Forward no answer destination for the
second extension.
For example, extension 224 is programmed to forward all
incoming calls to extension 235, which in turn is
programmed to forward all incoming calls to extension
240.
Unanswered calls coming in on an outside line are
automatically transferred to the Prime extension for that
line.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming capabilities 99
If the extension is a member of a hunt group, the Call Forward no
answer feature is overridden and the hunt group call will continue
to ring until the hunt time has expired.
A hunt group extension can be a Call Forward on busy extension.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠ three times. The display shows Fwd
to:None.
7. Press CHANGE and enter the extension number where you
want the calls to be sent. You can press CLR to change the
destination back to None.
8. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Changing the number of rings before a call is forwarded
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Capabilities.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Fwd no answer:.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Fwd to:nnn.
9. Press‘. The display shows Forward delay:.
10. Press CHANGE to choose the number of times the telephone
rings before it is forwarded: 2, 3, 4, 6, or 10 rings.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
100 Programming capabilities
Setting Call Forward on Busy
When a call comes in and you are already engaged on the
telephone or when you have Do Not Disturb activated at your
telephone, Call Forward on Busy automatically passes the call to
another extension.
If the extension is a member of a hunt group, the Call Forward on
Busy feature is overridden and the hunt group call will continue
to ring until the hunt time has expired.
A hunt group extension can be a Call Forward on Busy extension.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Capabilities.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Fwd no answer:.
8. Press ‘. The display shows Fwd on busy.
9. Press ≠. The display shows Fwd to:.
10. Press CHANGE and enter the extension number you want to
receive the calls. Press CLR to change the destination back to
None.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming capabilities 101
Programming Do Not Disturb on Busy
When you are busy on a call and a second call comes in, your
telephone rings softly to alert you to the second call. If you find
this second ring distracting, you can have the system prevent a
second call from ringing by assigning Do Not Disturb (DND) on
Busy to your telephone.
When DND on Busy is turned on for the extension, internal and
private network callers hear a busy tone instead of ringing when
you are on the telephone. External callers are transferred to the
Prime extension used in your system.
If you use DND on Busy, the line indicator for an external
incoming call still flashes, but your telephone does not ring.
Forward on Busy takes priority over DND on Busy.
If an external call uses a Direct Inward Access (DIA) line, the call
is processed according to the programming of the DIA line. If
there are no available appearances of the DIA line, the caller will
hear a busy tone.
Note: When using DND on busy with M7100N/T7100 or
M7000/T7000 telephones, there is no indication that a
second call is ringing on your telephone. Putting your first
call on hold automatically answers the second incoming
call.
If the extension is a member of a hunt group, the DND on Busy
feature overrides the hunt group. This extension does not receive
notification of hunt group calls while on a call.
See ‘Do Not Disturb’ on page 230 for information on using this
feature.
Setting and cancelling Do Not Disturb on Busy
You can set or cancel DND on Busy for each extension according
to personal preference.
The default is Y (Yes, DND on Busy is enabled), except for
extension 221.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
102 Programming capabilities
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Line access.
7. Press ‘. The display shows Capabilities.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Fwd no answer:.
9. Press ‘ twice. The display shows DND on busy:.
10. Press CHANGE to choose Y (yes) or N (No).
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Programming Handsfree
Norstar/BST telephones allow you to make calls without using
the telephone handset. When Full Handsfree operation is
programmed for a telephone, a Handsfree/Mute key is
automatically assigned to the telephone. Once a telephone has
Full Handsfree, you can also programme Automatic Handsfree.
Automatic Handsfree allows you to make and receive Handsfree
calls without pressing the Handsfree/Mute key.
Note: The T7208 and T7316 telephones have a separate Mute
button. The T7316E has separate buttons for both Handsfree and
Mute, located under the dial pad.
Once a telephone has Full Handsfree, you can also programme
Automatic Handsfree. Automatic Handsfree allows you to make
and receive Handsfree calls without pressing the designated
Handsfree key.
You can programme the type of Handsfree operation used with
each telephone or activate Handsfree Answerback. See ‘Chart 10:
Extension capabilities 2’ on page 323 in Appendix A for a
programming overview.
Note: Handsfree is not available on the M7100N/T7100,
M7000/T7000 telephones or a telephone connected by an
Analogue Terminal Adaptor.
See ‘Using Handsfree’ on page 239 for information about using
this feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming capabilities 103
5. Enter the extension number of the extension you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠ twice.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Handsfree:.
8. Press CHANGE to choose Auto, Std, or None.
9. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
ATTENTION!
The T7316E keystation must be set to Auto to allow the
handsfree button work. When a call is answered, the
keystation defaults to the last-used answer method.
Programming Handsfree answerback
Handsfree answerback allows you to answer a call without lifting
the receiver. It is always turned off for M1700N/T7000 and
M7000/T7000 telephones.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠ twice.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows HF answerback:.
8. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
9. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
ATTENTION!
The T7316E keystation defaults to the mode that was used
for the last call. For instance, if you use a headset to receive
a call, the next call defaults to the headset.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
104 Programming capabilities
Assigning a Pickup group
The Call pickup feature allows you to pick up calls that are
ringing at another extension in your Pickup group.
You can assign extensions into one of four Pickup groups.
Options for this setting are 1 to 4, and None. The default is None.
Extensions can be put into and taken out of any Pickup group. See
‘Answering a telephone using Pickup Group’ on page 241 for
information on using this feature.
A hunt group call ringing at an extension that is a member of a
Pickup group can be picked up by any extension in that call
Pickup group.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠ twice. The display shows Fwd no answer.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Pickup grp:.
8. Press CHANGE to assign the telephone to Pickup group 1, 2, 3,
4, or None.
9. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Assigning a page zone
Page zones give you the advantage of paging different parts of the
office without disturbing the entire office. You can assign
extensions to one of three page zones. (A zone is any set of
Norstar/BST extensions that you want to group together for
paging, regardless of their location.) The options for this setting
are zones 1, 2, 3, or None (no page zone assigned). The default is
page zone 1.
Members of a hunt group can be included in a page zone.
You can make an extension part of a page zone only if the
extension has paging set to Y (Yes).
Make sure that everyone who needs to make page announcements
has a list showing the extensions that are in each page zone.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming capabilities 105
See ‘Paging’ on page 270 for information on using this feature.
Note: You can make an announcement to one person by placing
a Voice call (≤flfl) to that person’s extension.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠ twice. The display shows Fwd no answer.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Page zone.
8. Press CHANGE to assign page zone 1, 2, 3, or None.
9. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Programming paging
You can choose whether a telephone is able to use the Page
feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠ twice. The display shows Fwd no answer.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Paging:.
8. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
9. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
106 Programming capabilities
Assigning telephones to the Direct-Dial extension
This setting allows you to programme which Direct-Dial
extensions the telephone can call. Direct-Dial extension numbers
and the digits you use to reach Direct-Dial telephones are
programmed in System programming. See ‘Assigning a DirectDial extension’ on page 75.
Direct-Dial extensions are usually a receptionist for your office or
for a particular department.
You can change which Direct-Dial telephone an extension is
assigned to including none at all. Any number of telephones can
be assigned to call the Direct-Dial telephone.
See ‘Chart 11: Extension capabilities 3’ on page 324 in Appendix
A for a programming overview.
See ‘Accessing a Direct-Dial extension’ on page 266 for
information on using this feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The displays shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠ twice. The display shows Fwd no answer.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows D-Dial.
8. Press CHANGE to select Extn1 or None.
9. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming capabilities 107
Allowing Priority call
If you get a busy signal or a Do Not Disturb message when you
have an urgent call for someone in your office, you can interrupt
their call using the Priority call feature.
By default, telephones are not allowed to make Priority calls. If
you want a telephone to be able to make a Priority call, you must
programme Priority call for that telephone.
A person who receives a Priority call while on another call has
eight seconds to accept or block the call. For information on
blocking calls, see ‘Do Not Disturb’ on page 230. If the person
does nothing, the Priority call feature puts their active call,
including conference parties, on Exclusive Hold and connects
your call.
See ‘Making a Priority call’ on page 253 for information on using
this feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠ twice. The display shows Fwd no answer.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Priority call:.
8. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
9. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
108 Programming capabilities
Assigning a Hotline
You can set up a Hotline telephone that automatically calls one
number (internal or external) when you lift the handset or press
the key labelled Handsfree. For example, you can have an
external Hotline to a taxi company for your customers to use.
A hunt group extension number can be specified as a Hotline
telephone.
Label the telephone, telling people that it is a Hotline and what
number it dials so that they do not use it mistakenly.
See ‘Using Hotline’ on page 285 for information on using this
feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠ twice. The display shows Fwd no answer.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Hotline.
8. Press CHANGE to select the type of call the Hotline makes:
None, Intrnl, or Extrnl.
Choosing Internal assigns an extension number.
Choosing External assigns an external number.
If you select an external number:
9. Press ≠. The display shows Extrnl#:None.
10. Press CHANGE.
11. Enter the telephone number as you would dial it. Press OK.
12. Press ‘, then CHANGE to choose Use prime line,
Use line:, Pool code:, or Use routing tabl.
13. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Bypassing a Hotline
Press a line key, or use the Pre-Dial or Automatic Dial feature
before you pick up the handset or press the key marked Intercom
on a Hotline telephone. Refer to Telephone Feature Card.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming capabilities 109
Auxiliary ringer
An auxiliary ringer is a separate external telephone ringer or bell
that must be connected by the installer. The installer programs the
auxiliary ringer to ring for calls on a particular line in
programming. An auxiliary ringer can also be programmed to
ring for a line placed in a Service mode. The extension default for
auxiliary ringer is No.
See ‘Chart 12: Extension capabilities 4’ on page 325 in Appendix
A for a programming overview.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠ twice. The display shows Fwd no answer.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Aux. ringer.
8. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
9. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
To use the auxiliary ringer with Night service, you must
programme under Services.
Activating Redirect ring
As the administrator, you may want to programme the system to
remind people when a line is being redirected. Redirect ring alerts
your extension with a brief ring when a call is redirected on one
of its lines.
See ‘Line redirection’ on page 276 for information on using this
feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
110 Programming capabilities
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠ twice. The display shows Fwd no answer.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Redirect ring:.
8. Press CHANGE to select Y (Yes) or N (No).
9. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
How Line redirection is different from Call Forward
Call Forward forwards all calls that arrive at a particular
telephone to another telephone within the Compact Plus system.
Line redirection redirects only the lines you specify, no matter
which telephones they appear on, to a telephone outside the
Compact Plus system. Line redirection takes precedence over
Call Forward.
Receive tones
Analogue equipment that is connected to the system with an
Analogue Terminal Adapter (external or internal), responds only
to tone dialling signals. If you have analogue equipment
connected to a telephone, set Receive tones for that extension to
Yes. Otherwise, leave Receive tones set to No.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠ twice. The display shows Fwd no answer.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Receive tones.
8. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
9. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming User preferences
• Programming User preferences.........112
• Changing the key programming for an extension.........112
• Changing a personal (user) speed dial code.........113
• Changing the Call log options.........114
• Changing the dialling options.........114
• Changing the display language.........115
• Changing the display contrast.........116
• Changing the Ring type.........116
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
112 Programming User preferences
Programming User preferences
The User preferences section of programming allows you to
programme memory keys, speed dial codes, and other settings for
any Norstar/BST telephone on the system.
For example, an employee may want to have the Do Not Disturb
feature programmed to a memory key or create a speed dial code.
Instead of programming from that employee’s telephone, you can
enter User preferences on the nearest telephone to make the
change.
See ‘Chart 13: User preferences’ on page 326, for a programming
overview.
You can copy User preferences settings from one extension to
another whenever COPY appears on the display. The only
programming that does not get copied is key programming
between different models of telephone.
Changing the key programming for an extension
If there is one or more key on a particular model of telephone that
you would like to change, you can customise one key at a time.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Line access.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows User prefernces.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Model: followed by a
five-digit code.
9. Press ‘. The display shows Key prgrming.
10. Press ≠. The display shows how many keys are on
that model of telephone.
11. Press FIND or press ‘ to see a list of key
programming.
12. Press TEL#, FEATR, or CLR to change the programming for any
key.
13. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming User preferences 113
Changing a personal (user) speed dial code
See ‘Personal Speed Dial codes’ on page 231 for information
about using this feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Capabilities.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows User prefernces.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Model: followed by a
five-digit code.
9. Press ‘ twice. The display shows User speed
dial.
10. Press ≠. The display shows the number of speed
dial codes that are available.
11. Press ‘ to see the first speed dial code (256).
12. Press ‘ to search through all the speed dial codes to
find the code you want to change.
13. Press ≠ when you see the code you want to change.
14. Press CHANGE and enter the telephone number the same way
you would dial it on the telephone.
15. Press OK.
16. Press ‘ and choose the line (or enter a code for a
line pool) that the speed dial code should use.
17. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
114 Programming User preferences
Changing the Call log options
See ‘Call Log’ on page 290 for information about using this
feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn:#.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Capabilities.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows User prefernces.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Model: followed by a
five-digit code.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows Call log opt’ns.
10. Press ≠. The display shows No one answered.
11. Press CHANGE to choose No one answered, Unanswerd by
me, Log all calls, or No autologging.
12. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Changing the dialling options
See ‘Dialling mode’ on page 224 for information about using this
feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows User prefernces.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Model: followed by a
five-digit code.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming User preferences 115
9. Press ‘ until the display shows Dialling opt’ns.
10. Press ≠. The display shows Automatic dial.
11. Press CHANGE to choose Automatic dial, Standard, or
Predial.
12. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Changing the display language
The Norstar system supports a Visually Impaired Operator
Console (VIOC), which provides computer-based speech
synthesis for the programming interface. To use this function, the
display language needs to be set to Operating.
See ‘Visually Impaired Operator Console’ on page 218 for
information on using this feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Capabilities.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows User prefernces.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Model: followed by a
five-digit code.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows Language:.
10. Press CHANGE to choose English or Opratng.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
116 Programming User preferences
Changing the display contrast
Display contrast allows you to lighten or darken the telephone
display to suit the lighting conditions in your office.
See ‘Display contrast’ on page 225 for information about using
this feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display show nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Capabilities.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows User prefernces.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Model: followed by a
five-digit code.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows Display cntrst:.
10. Press CHANGE to choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Note: You do not see any change in the display of the telephone
you are using when you are programming User
preferences from another telephone.
Changing the Ring type
See ‘Ring type’ on page 227 for information about using this
feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming User preferences 117
6. Press ≠. The display shows Capabilities.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows User prefernces.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Model: followed by a
five-digit code.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows Ring type:.
10. Press CHANGE to choose 1, 2, 3, or 4.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
118 Programming User preferences
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming Hunt groups
• Adding or removing members from a group.........121
• Programming Hunt groupsProgramming Hunt groups.........119
• Moving members of a group.........122
• Assigning or unassigning lines to a group.........122
• Assigning a distinctive ring pattern to a Hunt Group.........123
• Setting the distribution mode.........124
• Setting the hunt delay.........125
• Programming options if all hunt members are busy.........125
• Programming the queue timeout.........126
• Programming the overflow extension.........127
• Setting the name.........127
• Checking hunt group metrics.........128
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
120 Programming Hunt groups
Programming Hunt Groups
Establish hunt groups in your system to allow incoming calls to
reach a group of extensions. The hunt groups feature allows you
to call a group of extensions with a single directory number.
Hunt groups are used in situations where a group of people
performing the same task are required to answer a number of
related telephone queries. Some typical uses of hunt groups are:
• a sales department answering questions on product prices,
availability etc.
• a support department answering questions concerning the
operation of a product
• an emergency department answering calls for help
A company with support services for different products may want
to have a hunt group dedicated to each product. Support
personnel handling Product A can be in one group, and support
personnel handling Product B can be in another group. Incoming
calls look for the next available extension in the group. If no
extension is available, the hunt groups feature places the call in a
queue or routes it to an overflow extension.
Under the hunt groups sub-heading, you programme:
• members of a group
• member position in a group
• the lines assigned to a group
• the distribution of incoming calls
• the length of time the system looks for available agents before
sending the call to the overflow position
• how the system handles calls if all agents are busy
Note: Do not programme videophones as members of a hunt
group. Hunt groups allow one B channel connection at a
time and videophones use two B channels.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming Hunt groups 121
Adding or removing members from a group
Compact Plus supports six hunt groups with a maximum of 60
members system-wide. Members of the group can be any
Norstar/BST extension, DNA, or ISDN extension. An extension
can be in multiple hunt groups but each occurrence increases the
total number of members in the system.
There can be one appearance of the same hunt group on a set.
The extension number range for hunt groups is 315 to 320. The
extension numbers in this range cannot be members of a hunt
group.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Show group:.
7. Enter the hunt group number (1-6) you want to programme.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Member extns.
9. Press ≠. The display shows the members for that
group.
10. Press ADD to add a member or press REMOVE to remove a
member from the group.
11. To program the extension appearance, press ≠. The
display shows Appr&Ring.
12. Press CHANGE to select Appr only, Appr&Ring or Ring only.
13. Press ® to exit or ‘to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
122 Programming Hunt groups
Moving members of a group
Member order within a hunt group is important. The member
order determines how a call is routed through a hunt group.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Show group:.
7. Enter the hunt group number you want to programme (1 to 6).
8. Press ≠. The display shows Member extns.
9. Press ≠. The display shows the members for that
group.
10. Press MOVE to move an existing member to another place
within the hunt group. The display shows the member number
followed by an arrow.
11. Enter the new position number for the extension.
12. Press ® to exit or ‘to continue programming.
Assigning or unassigning lines to a group
It is recommended to set the hunt group line Prime extension to
None. Doing so prevents delayed ring transfer of external hunt
group calls to the Prime extension before the hunt group can
receive the call.
You can assign a line to only one group.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Show group:.
7. Enter the Hunt Group number you want to programme (1-6).
8. Press ≠. The display shows Member extns:.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming Hunt groups 123
9. Press ‘. The display shows Line assignment.
10. Press ≠. The display shows Show line:.
11. Enter the line number you want to program, press SCAN to go
the first line assigned to this group or press LIST to go to the
first line in the system.
12. Press CHANGE to programme the line as Unassigned or
Assigned.
*HGnn* means the line is assigned to another hunt group.
13. Press ® to exit or ‘to continue programming.
Assigning a distinctive ring pattern to a Hunt Group
You can assign distinctive ring patterns to your Hunt Group so
that calls can be rated in priority for the group.
These distinctive ring patterns, have the same characteristics as
for line and set distinctive ring patterns. Refer to ‘Sorting calls by
distinctive ring patterns’ on page 234.
The Hunt Group distinctive ring pattern determines how a call
will ring within the Hunt Group.
• If the Hunt Group ring pattern priority is higher than the line
ring pattern or the ring patterns on member telephones, the call
will ring at all telephones with the ring pattern specified for the
Hunt Group.
• If members of the group have ring patterns assigned to their
telephones that are higher than the ring patterns of the
incoming line or the Hunt Group, then the Hunt Group will use
the ring of the corresponding member telephones.
• If the incoming call (line) has a higher ring pattern assigned,
than the Hunt Group, the Hunt Group will ring with the line
ring pattern.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The display
shows Password:.
3. Press ¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ≠ until the display shows Member extns:.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Dstnct Ring:NONE.
8. Press CHANGE to toggle to the ring pattern number you want
to assign to the Hunt group line.
9. Press ® to exit or ‘to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
124 Programming Hunt groups
Setting the distribution mode
There are three distribution settings:
• Broadcast—rings each extension in the group
simultaneously. The system handles calls one at a time,
routing other calls according to the routing option selected in
the If busy setting (see ‘Programming options if all hunt
members are busy’ on page 125). When a call is answered, the
next call in the queue is presented to the hunt group.
In Broadcast mode, a single incoming call will ring
simultaneously at all the extensions in a group. This way, all
receptionists in the group can share the load of answering large
volumes of calls. An example is a fund-raising campaign
where a group of operators wait to take each call as it comes in.
• Sequential—starts the call at the first extension in the hunt
group. Distribution is complete when the system finds the first
free extension. This distribution method allows the system to
present simultaneous calls to the hunt group. Distribution is
order-based.
In Sequential mode, you can programme your top salesperson
to be the first member of the group to receive incoming calls.
• Cyclic—distribution begins with the member following the
last extension to receive a hunt group call. Distribution is
complete when the system finds the first free extension. This
distribution method allows the system to present simultaneous
calls to the hunt group. Distribution is order-based.
Using Cyclic mode, you ensure that your helpline personnel
receive calls in an evenly distributed method.
If a call goes unanswered and the hunt group has available agents,
the system routes the call through the member list until someone
answers the call or the queue time-out occurs. If a queue timeout
occurs, the system routes the call to the overflow position.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Show group:.
7. Enter the hunt group number you want to programme (1-6).
8. Press ≠. The display shows Member extns.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows Mode:.
10. Press CHANGE to set the mode: Sequential, Cyclic, Broadcast.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming Hunt groups 125
Setting the hunt delay
You can programme the number of ring cycles the system allows
at a hunt group extension before moving to the next hunt group
extension.
You can estimate the delay in seconds by multiplying the number
of rings by six.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Show group:.
7. Enter the hunt group number you want to programme (1-6).
8. Press ≠. The display shows Member extns.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows Hunt delay:.
10. Press CHANGE to select the setting: 1,2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Programming options if all hunt members are busy
There are three routing options if all agents are busy:
• BusyTone—the caller gets a busy tone
• Overflow—the call routes to the hunt group overflow position
• Queue—the call stays in the system for the period of time
programmed in Q timeout. Within this period of time, the call
presents to an agent if one becomes available. When time-out
occurs, the call routes to the hunt group overflow position.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
126 Programming Hunt groups
6. Press ≠. The display shows Show group:.
7. Enter the hunt group number you want to programme (1-6).
8. Press ≠. The display shows Member extns.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows If busy:.
10. Press CHANGE to set the mode: BusyTone, Overflow, Queue.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘to continue programming.
Programming the queue timeout
This setting allows you to programme the number of seconds a
call will remain in the hunt group queue before it is also routed to
the overflow position.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Show group:.
7. Enter the hunt group number you want to programme (1-6).
8. Press ≠. The display shows Member extns.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows Q Timeout:.
10. Press CHANGE to set the queue timeout: 15, 30, 45, 60, 120 or
180.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming Hunt groups 127
Programming the overflow extension
You can programme which extension receives overflow calls. If
the overflow extension is a hunt group extension, the call is
considered a new call and joins the queue.
The overflow extension can be an extension number associated
with a voice mailbox.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Show group:.
7. Enter the hunt group number you want to programme (1-6).
8. Press ≠. The display shows Member extns.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows Overflow:.
10. Press ≠. The display shows Overflow:HGn.
11. Press CHANGE to change the overflow position.
12. Enter the new overflow position.
13. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Setting the name
You can programme the hunt group name, such as SERVICE or
SALES. The name can be up to seven characters in length.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Show group:.
7. Enter the hunt group number you want to programme (1-6).
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
128 Programming Hunt groups
8. Press ≠. The display shows Member extns.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows Name:.
10. Press CHANGE.
11. Using the keypad, enter the name of the hunt group.
12. Press ‘ to store the name.
13. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Checking hunt group metrics
This feature provides you with hunt group call information.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Usage Metrics.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Show group:.
7. Enter the number of the hunt group you wish to view. The
display shows HG<n> metrics.
8. Press ≠. The display shows the date the information
was last cleared.
9. Press ‘. The display shows TotalCalls:.
The value shown is the total number of calls received by the
hunt group, to a maximum of 99999.
10. Press ‘. The display shows Ans:.
The values shown are the total number of calls that were
answered and the percentage of answered calls to total calls.
11. Press ‘. The display shows Avg ans: _sec.
The value shown is the average time in seconds that it took to
answer a call, to a maximum of 999.
12. Press ‘. The display shows Abndn:.
The values shown are the number of abandoned calls and the
percentage of abandoned calls to total calls.
13. Press ‘. The display shows Busy:.
The values shown are the number of times the hunt group was
busy and the percentage of busy calls to total calls.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming Hunt groups 129
14. Press ‘. The display shows Overfl:.
The values shown are the number of calls sent to the overflow
position and the percentage of overflow calls to total calls.
15. Press ‘. The display shows Avg Q:_sec.
The value shown is the average time, in seconds, the call
waited in the queue, to a maximum of 999.
16. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
130 Programming Hunt groups
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming feature settings
• Background music.........132
• On hold.........132
• Receiver volume.........133
• Camp timeout.........133
• Park timeout.........134
• Park mode.........135
• Transfer callback.........136
• Network callback.........137
• Conference tone.........138
• Directed (call) pickup.........139
• Page tone.........139
• Page timeout.........140
• Call log space.........140
• Alarm extension.........141
• Answer extension.........142
• Setting SWCA controls.........143
• CLID Match.........144
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
132 Programming feature settings
Background music
This feature allows people to listen to music through their
telephone speakers if an external music source has been installed.
The default is No, which means that Background music is
disabled.
See ‘Background music’ on page 132 for information on using
this feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Backgrnd music:.
8. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
9. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
On hold
You can choose what a caller hears when the call has been put on
hold.
Note: In systems networked with private circuits, it is a good
idea to have callers hear tones on all systems on the private
network. Otherwise, callers who are transferred across the
private network may hear a confusing variety of music,
tones, and silence.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Backgrnd music:.
8. Press ‘ until the display shows On hold:.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming feature settings 133
9. Press CHANGE to choose Tones, Music, or Silence.
10. Press ® to exit or ‘to continue programming.
Receiver volume
Receiver volume allows you to specify whether the volume level
of a receiver or headset returns to the system default level when
a call is ended or put on hold, or whether it remains at the level
set at the individual telephone.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Backgrnd music:.
8. Press ‘ until the display shows Receiver volume.
9. Press ≠ and use CHANGE to choose Use sys volume
or Use extn volume.
10. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Camp timeout
You can send an external call to another extension, even though
all its lines are busy, using the Camp-on feature. It is useful for
people who process many calls, such as secretaries or
receptionists. Camp timeout specifies the number of seconds
before an unanswered call returns to the telephone that camped
the call.
See ‘Transferring to a busy extension (Call Camping)’ on
page 254 for information on using this feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
134 Programming feature settings
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press ‘ until the display shows Camp time-out:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150, or 180
seconds.
10. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Park timeout
The Call Parking feature allows you to place a call on hold and
assign it a code so it can be retrieved from any telephone in the
Compact Plus system. Park timeout specifies the number of
seconds before an unanswered call returns to the extension that
parked the call.
See ‘Call Parking’ on page 250 for information on using this
feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press ‘ until the display shows Park time-out:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 300 or
600 seconds.
10. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming feature settings 135
Park mode
Park mode allows you to suspend a call. The call can then be
retrieved by entering a retrieval code at any Norstar/BST
extension in the system.
The Park mode retrieval code is a three-digit number. By default,
the first digit of that number is 1, with the possible retrieval codes
ranging from 101 to 109.
Note: 109 is reserved for M7000/T7000 and M7100/T7100
telephones.
You can determine how the system will assign retrieval codes to
all telephones, except the M7000/T7000 and M7100/T7100
telephones, by choosing one of the following modes:
Lowest—Norstar assigns the lowest available retrieval code. If
there is only one parked call on the system, the number is 101. If
there are three calls, they are assigned 101, 102, and 103.
Cycle—Norstar assigns the next available retrieval code in the
sequence (101 to 108). If the last parked call was assigned 106,
then the next one is assigned 107. If the last retrieval code was
108, then the next code is 101.
See ‘Call Parking’ on page 250 for information on using this
feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press ‘ until the display shows Park Mode:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose Lowest or Cycle.
10. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
136 Programming feature settings
Transfer callback
If Transfer callback is enabled, after a specified number of rings,
a transferred call that remains unanswered returns to the
telephone that made the transfer. Transfer callback allows you to
enable/disable this feature, and to specify the number of rings
before the call is returned when the feature is enabled. You can
estimate the delay in seconds if you multiply the number of rings
by three.
See ‘Transferring a call’ on page 253 for information on the
Transfer feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press ‘ until the display shows Trnsfr callbk:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
10. Press ‘. The display shows Trnsfr callbk:.
11. Press CHANGE to choose 3, 4, 5, 6, or 12 rings.
12. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming feature settings 137
Network callback
If you transfer a call to a private network destination and the call
is not answered, it comes back to you after a specified time.
Network callback defines the time, in seconds, before a call is
returned to your extension.
Since the time required to transfer a call across the private
network varies depending on the complexity of your private
network, you may need to experiment to achieve the correct
setting.
Note: Depending on how a private network call is routed, it may
not always be possible for the system to return a
transferred call.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press ‘ until the display shows Netwk callbk:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose 15, 30, 45, 60, or 90 seconds.
10. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Held line reminder and delay
A reminder tone and display message occur at a Norstar/BST
telephone when a call has been placed on hold for a certain period
of time. The display continues to show the name of the held line
until the call is dealt with. In the case of multiple calls on hold,
the display shows the name of the line that has been held the
longest. Once that call has been dealt with, the display shows the
number of the next longest held call.
You can switch Held line reminder on or off and set the time
before the reminder takes effect.
The Held line reminder emits a double periodic tone. This tone
distinguishes the feature from the Call Waiting tone, which uses
a single periodic tone.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
138 Programming feature settings
See ‘Holding’ on page 246 for information on this feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press ‘ until the display shows Held reminder:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
10. Press ‘. The display shows Remind delay:.
11. Press CHANGE to choose 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, or 180 seconds.
12. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Conference tone
This tone may be heard by all parties as soon as a three-way call
is established using the Conference or Privacy feature. You can
turn Conference tones on and off for the whole system.
See ‘Making a conference call’ on page 259 for information on
using the Conference feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press ‘ until the display shows Confrence tone:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
10. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming feature settings 139
Directed (call) pickup
The Directed pickup feature allows someone to pick up calls that
are ringing at another telephone by entering ≤‡fl and the
extension number. You can enable or disable Directed pickup for
the system. The default is Yes, which means that Directed pickup
is enabled.
See ‘Answering a telephone using Directed Pickup’ on page 240
for information on using this feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press ‘ until the display shows Directd pickup:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
10. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Page tone
You can choose whether a tone sounds before a page begins.
See ‘Paging’ on page 270 for information on using the Paging
feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press ‘ until the display shows Page tone:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
10. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
140 Programming feature settings
Page timeout
The Paging feature is automatically disconnected after a specified
length of time.
See ‘Paging’ on page 270 for information on using the Paging
feature.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press ‘ until the display shows Page timeout:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose 15, 30, 60, 120, 180, 300, 600, 2700
seconds.
10. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Call log space
Call log space customises how log space is allocated to
telephones in the system. Resetting all logs allows you to
reallocate the Call log space equally to all telephones in your
system.
Use this heading only if you want to allocate an equal amount of
log space to all the telephones in your system. There are 250 Call
log spaces available in the system. There are no spaces allocated
by default. Changing the space allocation using log defaults
defines the log space available to all telephones in the system.
Any remaining unassigned log space is available in a log pool,
and can be reallocated under Terminals&Extns.
Reallocating Call log space may destroy call log data at
telephones that lose space.
See ‘Call Log’ on page 290 for information on using the Call log
feature.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming feature settings 141
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press ‘ until the display shows Call log space.
9. Press ≠. The display shows Reset all logs?.
10. Press YES and use the key pad to enter the space allocation for
the call log at each extension. You must use a three-digit
number (for example, 020 to give each extension 20 spaces).
11. Press YES to accept the settings and end programming. The
system automatically reallocates log space. Press NO to reset
the number of spaces allocated to each log.
Alarm extension
An Alarm telephone displays system alarm codes, should they
occur. You can determine which telephone receives the alarms.
The default is extension 221.
The Alarm telephone must have a twoline display.
The Alarm telephone must be an M7310N
or M7324N telephone.
See ‘Recording and reporting alarm codes’ on page 204 for
information on the alarm codes.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Featr settings.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
142 Programming feature settings
7. Press ≠. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press ‘ until the display shows AlarmExtn:.
9. Press CHANGE.
10. Enter the extension number or press CLR to set the Alarm
telephone to None.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Answer extension
The Answer extns setting in Terminals&Extns programming
allows you to assign Answer extension numbers to a telephone.
The Answer extn setting in Featr settings programming allows
you to determine what types of calls will alert at the telephone.
Your choices are: basic, Enhanced, and Extended.
Basic permits the same call coverage allowed in Compact Plus
Release 1. Enhanced permits the same call coverage as Compact
Plus Release 1 as well as overflow call routing calls but will not
permit blind transferred calls. Extended permits all call types
except priority calls, voice calls and other Answer key calls to
alert at the telephone.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password :.
3. Press ¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt Groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Backgrnd music:.
8. Press ‘ until the display shows Ans. extn:.
9. Press CHANGE to select the settings: Basic, Enhanced, and
Extended.
10. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Programming feature settings 143
Setting SWCA controls
System Wide Call Appearance (SWCA) can be assigned to up to
16 program buttons on each telephone in a group. This feature
allows a group of users to see and answer incoming calls on any
telephone in the group.
You can program the telephone keys while you are setting up the
telephones, or the user can program this feature to keys with a
display at any time. However, all telephones in an answer group
should have the same keys assigned to the same SWCA feature
code. Refer to ‘Changing the key programming for an extension’
on page 112 for general information about setting or changing
key programming for a telephone. SWCA keys can be assigned
to memory keys using feature codes ≤•fi¤‚ to
≤•fi‹fi.
You can define how lines will associate to these keys under
Feature Settings.
The Auto Associate setting allows you to determine if calls will
automatically be associated with assigned SWCA keys (Y), or if
the user will have to press the Hold button to have the line move
to a SWCA key (N).
As well, you can determine if a call put on hold on a SWCA key
can be picked up by other members in the group (Invoke by
Hold: Y), or if the call remains exclusive to the telephone where
the call was put on hold (Invoke by Hold: N).
See ‘Changing the key programming for an extension’ on
page 112 for general information about setting or changing key
programming for a telephone. SWCA keys can be assigned to
memory keys using feature codes 520 to 535.
See ‘Using SWCA line buttons’ on page 236 for information
about using SWCA keys.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The display
shows Password :.
3. Press ¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt Groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Backgrnd music:.
8. Press ‘ until the display shows SWCA Cntrl:.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
144 Programming feature settings
9. Press ≠. The display shows Auto Associate: N.
10. Press CHANGE to choose the Y or N option.
11. Press ‘. The display shows Invoke by Hold: N.
12. Press CHANGE to choose the Y or N option.
13. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
CLID Match
This setting determines the minimum number of digits that an
external call must match to an existing system speed dial number
in order for the system to offer a name display for the CLID
prompt if the system speed dial number is set up to display the
caller name. Refer to the Module Plus System Administrator
Guide for information about setting up System Speed Dials.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The display
shows Password:.
3. Press ¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Backgrnd music: N.
8. Press ‘ until the display shows CLID match: 8.
9. Press CHANGE to select the a number from 3 to 8, or select
None, if you do not require any number matching.
10. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Moving and copying
• Extension relocation.........146
• Copying programming for telephones.........147
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
146 Moving and copying
Extension relocation
The Extension relocation feature allows you to move a telephone
from one extension socket to another without losing any of its
custom programming or its assigned extension number. By
default Extension relocation is set to No.
Wait one minute between moves.
After moving a telephone, wait one minute
before moving the telephone a second time
or changing the extension number for that
telephone. The CCU may take up to 60
seconds to recognise a telephone moved
to a new location.
Do not connect another telephone to
the old socket before relocating the
telephone.
When moving a telephone with Extension
relocation turned on, do not connect
another telephone to the extension socket
of the telephone you are moving before
connecting the moved telephone to a new
extension socket.
If you connect a telephone of the same
type to the vacated extension socket, that
telephone receives the programming of the
original telephone.
If you connect a telephone of a different
type to the vacated extension socket, that
telephone receives default programming
and the original telephone programming is
lost.
Note: Turn Extension relocation to No after the telephone
installation and programming are completed, rather than
before. This provides you with more flexibility in testing
equipment. If Extension relocation is set to No while a
telephone is moved, that telephone extension number and
data remain with the physical port on the Central Control
Unit (CCU); the telephone does not receive the original
programming when it is reconnected elsewhere.
Remember to record any programming changes in the
Programming Record.
See ‘Chart 14: Extension relocation’ on page 327 in Appendix A,
for a programming overview.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Moving and copying 147
Relocate to extension jacks that are configured
for telephones.
When moving extensions from one jack to
another, ensure that all jacks support a
Norstar/BST telephone. If a fax machine,
Analogue Terminal Adapter, analogue
telephone, or modem was plugged into the
jack, do not plug a Norstar/BST telephone into
the jack. Refer to your telephony technician to
get the jack rewired for a Norstar system
telephone, if you need to add a Norstar/BST
telephone at that location.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Featr settings.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Backgrnd music.
8. Press ‘ until the display shows Extn relocatn:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
10. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Copying programming for telephones
During programming, you can copy certain programmed settings
from one line to another, or from one telephone to another using
the COPY key when it appears on the display. You can copy either
system programming, or system programming and personal
programming.
Personal programming includes the settings programmed by
people at their own telephones using feature codes. You can only
copy personal programming between telephones of the same type
when both are plugged into the system.
See ‘Chart 15: Copying settings’ on page 327 in Appendix A for
a programming overview.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
148 Moving and copying
Copying system programming to a single extension
Pressing the COPY softkey allows you to copy programming from
one extension to another extension, to a range of extensions, or to
all extensions in the system.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠ and enter the extension number whose
programming you want to copy.
5. Press COPY. The display shows Copy:SYSTEM data.
6. Press CHANGE to toggle between SYSTEM data (to copy the
programming of the system) and SYSTEM+USER (to copy the
programming of the system and the programming of a
particular extension).
7. Press ‘. The display shows Copy:SINGLE.
8. Press ‘. The display shows Copy to:.
9. Enter the extension number of the extension that will be
programmed. The display shows nnn>nnn briefly, then
returns to Copy to:.
10. Keep entering extension numbers if you have other single
extensions that you wish to programme.
11. Press CANCL when you are finished.
Copying system programming to a range of extensions
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠ and enter the extension number whose
programming you want to copy.
5. Press COPY. The display shows Copy:SYSTEM data.
6. Press CHANGE to toggle between SYSTEM data (to copy the
programming of the system) and SYSTEM+USER (to copy the
programming of the system and the programming of a
particular extension).
7. Press ‘. The display shows Copy:SINGLE.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Moving and copying 149
8. Press CHANGE to select either a range of extensions or all
extensions.
9. Press ‘. The display shows Only equippd Ext.
10. Press CHANGE to switch between equipped extensions and all
extensions.
11. Press ‘. The display shows Begin at:.
12. Enter the starting extension number. The display shows
End at:.
13. Enter the ending extension number. The display shows
nnn>nnn-nnn?.
14. Press OK to copy the programming to the specified extensions.
You can leave the programming session even if the copy has not
been completed. If you exit programming, copying continues
uninterrupted until it is complete.
Depending on the activities going on in the system, a copy may
take some time to take effect. The brief display you see once you
have finished a copying session does not indicate the process is
complete.
Event codes capture both the start and completion of the copying
process.
System settings you can copy
•
•
•
•
•
line assignment
line pool access
Prime line designation
number of intercom keys
settings programmed under the heading Capabilities
Personal settings you can copy
•
•
•
•
•
•
P0607114 Issue 01
the personal programming for dialling modes
line key positions
personal speed dial entries
automatic delivery of call information for outgoing calls
log settings
programmed memory keys
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
150 Moving and copying
Settings you cannot copy
•
•
•
•
•
•
extension number and name
log password
Direct-Dial and Extra-Dial extension designations
Service mode Control extension designation for a line
Service mode Ringing extension designation for a line
Prime extension designation for a line, or private line
appearances
• personal programming for display contrast, ring type, and ring
volume
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Settings for analogue equipment
• Settings for analogue equipment.........152
• Setting the delay before the ATA/I-ATA answers.........152
• Changing the dial mode of an ATA or an I-ATA.........153
• Setting whether the ATA/I-ATA should receive system tones.........154
• Setting whether an ATA is used on-site or off-site.........155
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
152 Settings for analogue equipment
Settings for analogue equipment
Analogue equipment includes answering and fax machines as
well as analogue telephones. Analogue equipment is connected to
the Compact Plus system through the Integrated Analogue
Terminal Adapter (I-ATA) or with an external Analogue Terminal
Adapter (ATA). An external ATA responds only to incoming tone
dialling signals.
The ATA and I-ATA allow analogue telephones to access some
Norstar features such as Call Forward, Conference, Transfer, and
Last Number Redial. Telephones connected to the ATA or I-ATA
cannot display the time and date. For information on using
Norstar features from an external analogue telephone connected
to an ATA, refer to Analogue Terminal Adapter User Card.
You can adjust the following settings:
• change the number of rings the analogue equipment waits
before answering a call
• change the extension used for analogue equipment to receive
tone dialling signals
• set whether an external ATA is required and whether it is used
on-site or off-site
• change the Dial mode for outgoing data of an external ATA to
either tone or pulse
• set whether the ATA should receive confirmation and error
tones (only for analogue telephones)
Setting the delay before the ATA/I-ATA answers
To accommodate the device connected to the ATA, you may want
to lengthen or shorten the delay before the device is able to
receive tones. For example, a modem or fax machine requires
only a short delay.
Refer to ATA Terminal Feature Card for information on using the
ATA features.
See "Chart 16: ATA settings" on page 328 in Appendix A for a
programming overview.
The ATA answer timer controls this delay. The default setting is
a 7-second delay before the speech path is connected.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Settings for analogue equipment 153
4. Press ≠. The display show Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Line access.
7. Press ‘. The display shows Capabilities.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Fwd no answer.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows ATA settings.
10. Press ≠. The display shows ATA ans timer:.
11. Press CHANGE to choose 3, 5, 7, or 10 seconds.
12. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Changing the dial mode of an ATA or an I-ATA
You must tell the system whether the device connected to the
ATA sends out pulse or Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF)
signals.
The default signal is tone.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display show Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Line access.
7. Press ‘. The display shows Capabilities.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Fwd no answer.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows ATA settings.
10. Press ≠. The display shows ATA ans timer:.
11. Press ‘. The display shows ATA mode:.
12. Press CHANGE to choose Tone or Pulse.
13. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
154 Settings for analogue equipment
Setting whether the ATA/I-ATA should receive system
tones
You must tell the system whether the device connected to the
ATA should receive confirmation and error tones. These tones
inform a person of call progress, but confuse a modem or fax
machine.
• If the ATA is connected to a telephone, set tones to Y.
• If the ATA is connected to any other device, set tones to N.
The default is No.
Note: This setting does not interfere with intrusion and
conference tones on a telephone connected to an ATA.
These tones are heard through the telephone handset
regardless of the ATA tones setting.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display show Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Line access.
7. Press ‘. The display shows Capabilities.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Fwd no answer.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows ATA settings.
10. Press ≠. The display shows ATA ans timer:.
11. Press ‘ until the display shows ATA tones:.
12. Press CHANGE to choose Y (Yes) or N (No).
13. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Settings for analogue equipment 155
Setting whether an ATA is used on-site or off-site
The external ATA can connect Compact Plus to analogue
telephones, modems, or answering machines that are either on
your premises or at another location. When you want to connect
extensions at some other location to your system, specify off-site.
The default is on-site.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display show Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Line access.
7. Press ‘. The display shows Capabilities.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Fwd no answer.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows ATA settings.
10. Press ≠. The display shows ATA ans timer:.
11. Press ‘ until the display shows ATA use:.
12. Press CHANGE to choose On-site or Off-site.
13. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
156 Settings for analogue equipment
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Services
• Using alternate or scheduled services.........158
• Turning services on or off.........158
• Designating alternate routes for calls.........161
• Programming routes.........163
• Programming destination codes.........164
• Turning a manual service on or off with a feature code.........167
• Assigning control extensions.........168
• Changing the name of a schedule.........169
• Changing the time of a schedule.........170
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
158 Services
Using alternate or scheduled services
Your Compact Plus system is set up to handle calls during normal
business hours. However, you may wish to handle incoming calls
differently at lunch time, in the evening, at night, or during
holidays.
To accommodate changes, Compact Plus provides services that
let you customise the way calls are handled at different times of
the day. Besides a Normal schedule, there are six additional
schedules. Three of the schedules are already named: Lunch,
Evening, and Night. You can assign new names for these modes
and assign names to the three unnamed schedules.
When Ringing service and Restriction service are set to manual,
a control extension is used to place the extensions and exchange
lines that it controls into and out of service schedules. A control
extension can be assigned to control either lines or extensions, or
both lines and extensions.
A service schedule activates three aspects of how the system
operates: Ringing, Restriction, and Routing.
• You can customise the Ringing service so that
— an extra extension rings for calls placed to the Direct-Dial
extension
— additional extensions ring for incoming calls
— an auxiliary ringer notifies when a line rings
• You can bar long-distance calls by applying Restriction
service to a line or extension in a service schedule.
• You can take advantage of alternate route selection by
assigning different routes to be used during the different
schedules.
Turning services on or off
Ringing service
You can have Ringing service set up to run differently for each of
the six schedules. You may decide you want Ringing service for
the Night schedule to come into effect only when it is turned on
and off manually.
If you manually call on a service, it remains in effect until you
cancel it, regardless of any automatic modes scheduled. Manual
service also overrides any automatic mode that is active.
If you programme a service as Manual, you must use the control
extension to turn the service on using a feature code. The default
control extension for all lines and extensions is 221.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Services 159
See "Chart 17: Ringing service" on page 329 in Appendix A for
a programming overview.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ twice. The display shows Services.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Ringing service.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Ringing groups.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Sched:Night.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Service:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose Manual, Auto, or Off.
10. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Add extensions for Ringing service
You can add lines within groups to ring for these services on
different extensions. For example, you might want the ring to be
heard at two locations for ease of access. To add an extension:
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ twice. The display shows Services.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Ringing service.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Ringing groups.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Ring grp: 001.
8. Press ‘ to cycle through the ring groups until you
find the one you want (from 001 to 100). Or, enter the number
directly on the keypad.
9. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
10. Press ‘ to cycle through the extensions available, or
enter the number directly on the keypad. The extension
currently assigned to Ringing service will display Assigned.
11. Press CHANGE to assign another extension to ringing service.
12. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue in programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
160 Services
Deleting extensions from ringing service
To delete an extension from Ringing service, follow the same
steps as for adding. The final CHANGE step will Unassign the
extension.
Restriction service
Assigning restriction filters to schedules gives you control over
calls made outside of normal business hours. For example, you
may allow long-distance calls during the day but bar them in the
evening (using the Night schedule) and on weekends (using
Schedule 5, which you may have renamed Weekend schedule).
See "Chart 18: Restriction service" on page 329 in Appendix A
for a programming overview.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ twice. The display shows Services.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Ringing service.
6. Press ‘. The display shows Restrn service.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Sched:Night.
8. Press ≠ and use CHANGE to choose Manual, Auto, or
Off.
9. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Routing service
Instead of having to manually decide which routes to use at
different times of the day, you can set the routes to automatically
be selected according to the programmed settings for each of the
six schedules.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Services 161
Designating alternate routes for calls
The programming for Routing service decides what path an
outgoing call takes using the digits that are dialed.
When you select an internal line and dial, the numbers you enter
are checked against the routes. If the number you dialled starts
with a destination code, the system uses the line pool and dials out
digits specified by the route assigned to that destination code, and
then dials the number that you dialled.
Routing service replaces a number of tasks that otherwise have to
be done manually, including
• entering a line pool code
• dialling an access code for a long-distance carrier
• accessing an alternate route if the Prime line is busy or
unavailable
Uniform numbering plan
Compact Plus can be programmed to provide dialling
transparency by using a uniform numbering plan. For example, a
worker at the head office in London can call a colleague at a
branch office in Birmingham as though they were calling an
extension in their own office.
Dialling transparency depends on establishing a numbering plan
where all extension numbers are unique and of a uniform length.
For example, if you have three company sites (two in London and
one in Birmingham), then all three sites should have the same
number of digits in their extension numbers, and each extension
number should be unique.
When performing System Start-up, you can change the starting
value and length of extension numbers as well as the Received
number length. If you apply the PBX template at System Start-up,
received numbers and the Received number length are set
automatically to match the extension numbers.
How Routing service works
There are two headings for Routing service: Routes and
Dest codes. Under Routes, you programme DialOut and Use.
• Dial Out—specifies the digits (up to 24) to be dialled out to
reach the called extension.
• Use—defines a specific line pool to be used to make the call.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
162 Services
Under Dest codes, you programme the destination route and
AbsorbLength.
• Normal—is for assigning the route code to be used during
regular business hours.
• Absorb Length—indicates how many of the digits in the
destination code should be absorbed by the system (not dialled
out to reach the called extension).
When a caller dials a number, Compact Plus checks the leading
digits of the number against the destination codes. If the leading
digits are matched to a destination code, Compact Plus proceeds
to select the route containing the appropriate line pool and
dial-out digits. It then adds the digits that the caller dialled (minus
the ones that are to be absorbed from the destination code).
In the following example, a caller at extension 6625 in London
wants to reach a colleague in Maidenhead. Without the Routing
service, the caller would have to select a line and dial
01628 784221 to reach extension 4221 in Maidenhead.
Because the system has an appropriate route and destination
code, the caller simply dials 4221. The system recognises 4 as a
destination code. It checks destination code 4, which instructs it
to use Dial Out 01628 78 and Line Pool A from Route 002. It is
instructed not to absorb any digits from the destination code, so it
adds all of the caller’s digits (4221) to complete the call.
Example of a simple route
Extn 6625
Extn 4221
(dialled digits 4221)
Line pool A
(dialled digits 01628 784221)
Routing service settings
Routes (Route 002)
DialOut:
01628 78
Use:
Pool A
Dest codes (DstCode 4)
Normal:
002
AbsorbLength: 0
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Services 163
Specifying the type of line to be used
Each route allows you to programme the line pool, and, thus, the
type of line to be used as the outgoing facility to reach a
destination. For example, if ISDN lines have been placed in Line
Pool B, specifying pool B as the line pool to use in a route for a
particular destination code ensures that all calls being routed to
that destination use ISDN lines.
You must ensure that extensions and ISDN terminals have access
to the line pools that they need to make calls (programmed under
Line Access in Lines).
See "Chart 19: Routing service" on page 330 in Appendix A for
a programming overview.
Programming routes
Dial Out
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Services.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Ringing service.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Routing service.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Routes.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Show route:.
9. Enter a three-digit route code or press ‘.
10. Press ≠. The display shows DialOut:.
11. Press CHANGE.
12. Enter the Dial Out digits (up to 24) or press CANCL to choose
No number.
You can press ≤‡° to insert a 1.5-second pause in the
dialling string, if necessary.
Route 000 shows no DialOut:No numbr by default and
cannot be changed.
13. Press OK.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
164 Services
Use Pool
1. Begin with DialOut: (step 10 of previous procedure).
2. Press ‘. The display shows Use:
3. Press CHANGE to Pool A, Pool B, or Pool C.
Route 000 uses Pool A by default and cannot be changed.
Programming destination codes
Dest code
When programming destination codes, you can use wild cards as
the last number in a destination code string. By using wild cards,
you can reduce the number of destination codes programmed in
the system, maximizing the distribution of destination codes in
the system.
The wild card character is added to the destination code by
pressing the ANY key as the last digit of the code. This character
represents any digit from 0 to 9, except for digits already
programmed or used by other numbering plans. Should there be
a conflict with other digits already programmed or used with by
numbering plans, the digit will not be displayed.
The wild card character can only be used to group destination
codes that use the same Route and digit absorb length.
Given the routes shown in the table below, the next two tables
show you how to set up destination codes with or without wild
card characters.
Route
Dial Out
Line Pool
555
0162 237 625
Line Pool C
565
0173 133 2211
Line Pool A
Destination codes not using a wild card
Destination
codes
Route
Absorb Length
Dial Out
0621
555
3
0162 237 6251
0622
555
3
0162 237 6252
0623
555
3
0162 237 6253
0624
555
3
0162 237 6254
0625
555
3
0162 237 6255
0626
555
3
0162 237 6256
0627
565
All
0173 133 2211
0628
555
3
0162 237 6258
0629
555
3
0162 237 6259
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Services 165
Destination codes using the ANY character
Destination
codes
Route
Absorb
Length
Dial Out
062 •
555
3
0162 237 625X
where X is the final dialout
digit, from 1 to 9, but not 7
0627
565
All
0173 133 2211
Enter a destination code that is recognised when used as part of a
telephone number for an outgoing call. It can be up to seven digits
long.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Services.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Ringing service.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Routing service.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Routes.
8. Press ‘. The display shows Dest codes.
9. Press ≠. The display shows Show DstCode:.
10. If there are no codes defined, use ADD, the keypad, and OK to
enter a new destination code (maximum seven). To enter a
wild card character (•) in the destination code, press the ANY
display key.
11. If there are codes defined, press ‘ to select one.
12. Use ADD, FIND, and REMOVE to change the destination code.
Normal rte
Select which route a call using the destination code will take
during normal service and for each of the schedules. The
automatic schedule times are programmed under Services. The
default Normal route is 000, which has no Dial Out digits and
uses Line Pool A.
Note: Be sure you have pre-programmed the route. See
"Designating alternate routes for calls" on page 161.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
166 Services
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Services.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Ringing service.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Routing service.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Routes.
8. Press ‘. The display shows Dest codes.
9. Press ≠. The display shows Show DstCode:.
10. If there are no codes defined, use ADD, the keypad, and OK to
enter a new destination code (maximum seven). To enter a
wild card character (•) in the destination code, press the ANY
display key.
11. Press ≠. The display shows Normal:.
12. Press CHANGE to select a different route for the destination
code.
13. Enter the three-digit code.
Absorb length
Select the portion of the destination code that is always absorbed
by the system and not used in the dialling sequence.
1. Begin with Normal: (step 11 of the previous procedure).
2. Press ≠. The display shows AbsorbLength:.
3. Press CHANGE.
4. Select the number of digits to be absorbed: 0, All, or any
number up to the length of the destination code.
5. Press ® to exit or ‘ to programme the next
schedule.
If a telephone number does not match any of the programmed
destination codes, the user must first decide which line to select
and then dial the number. To make this task simple and to ensure
that all long-distance calls are being routed consistently, all area
codes in the United Kingdom numbering plan should be
programmed as destination codes.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Services 167
For example, a destination code for Maidenhead might look like
this:
• Destination code: 01628
Normal route: 003
AbsorbLength: 0
• Route: 003
DialOut: No number
Use: Pool C
A caller wishing to dial Maidenhead might dial 01628 237625.
The system would recognise 01628 as a destination code. It
would select Pool C, absorb no digits, add no Dial Out digits, and
dial the remaining digits to complete the call.
Routing service modifications.
Changes to routes should only be made
during least busy call times or on an idle
system. Plan to programme routes when
user activity is at a minimum.
Turning a manual service on or off with a feature code
There are separate on and off codes for each of these services:
Ringing, Routing, and Restriction.
≤°‡⁄
Turn on Ringing service.
≤£°‡⁄
Turn off Ringing service.
≤°‡¤
Turn on Restriction service.
≤£°‡¤
Turn off Restriction service.
≤°‡‹
Turn on Routing service.
≤£°‡‹
Turn off Routing service.
To turn on a service
From a Control extension, enter the feature code to turn Ringing,
Restriction, or Routing service on. If activating Restriction or
Routing service, use the password ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN).
The display shows Service Modes ON.
To turn off a service
From a Control extension, enter the feature code to turn Ringing,
Restriction, or Routing service off. The display shows Normal
followed by the name of the service (Ringing, Restr’n, or
Routing).
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
168 Services
Assigning control extensions
When Ringing service and Restriction service are set to Manual,
a control extension is used to place the extensions and exchange
lines that it controls into and out of service schedules. A control
extension can be assigned to control either lines or extensions, or
both lines and extensions.
You can also use a control extension to manually override an
automatic schedule.
You may want different lines to be assigned to different control
extensions. For example, if the Customer Service department is
open during evening hours, you could place the Customer Service
lines under a separate control extension. The Sales department,
which closes at the end of the afternoon, could be placed under a
different control extension that could call on a service schedule
for those lines, while leaving the Customer Service lines
unaffected.
Assigning lines to a control extension
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Services.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Ringing service.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Common settings.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Control extns.
8. Press ≠ twice. The display shows Show line:.
9. Enter the line number. The display shows the line number
followed by the current control extension.
10. Press CHANGE and enter the extension number you want to
assign as the control extension for this line.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Services 169
Assigning extensions to a control extension
In addition to placing lines into Service modes, a control
extension can apply Restriction service (dialling filters) to other
extensions.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Services.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Ringing service.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Common settings.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Control extns.
8. Press ≠. The display shows For lines.
9. Press ‘. The display shows For extns.
10. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
11. Enter the extension number. The display shows the extension
number followed by the current control extension.
12. Press CHANGE and enter the extension number you want to
assign as the control extension for this extension.
13. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Changing the name of a schedule
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Services.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Ringing service.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Common settings.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Control extns.
8. Press ‘. The display shows Schedule names.
9. Press ≠. The display shows Sched 1:.
10. Press CHANGE and enter the name you want to assign to the
schedule.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
170 Services
Changing the time of a schedule
It is only necessary to programme the start and stop times for
schedules that are activated automatically.
If you are programming a schedule to start and stop at the same
time each day, use COPY to transfer the settings from one day to
the next.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Services.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Ringing service.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Common settings.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Control extns.
8. Press ‘ twice. The display shows Schedule times.
9. Press ≠. The display shows Monday.
10. Press ≠. The display shows Sched:Night.
11. Press ≠. The display shows Start time:.
12. Press CHANGE and enter the time you want the schedule to
start.
13. Press ‘. The display shows Stop time:.
14. Press CHANGE and enter the time you want the schedule to
stop. Press OK to accept a.m. or CHANGE to accept p.m.
15. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Passwords
• Password security.........172
• Setting the SAPLUS password.........172
• Setting the Administrator password.........173
• Setting the Basic password.........173
• Hospitality passwords.........174
• I-RAD password.........175
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
172 Passwords
Password security
You can, and should, change your passwords regularly for
security reasons. Keep a record of your passwords in a secure
place, and remember that the longer the password, the more likely
it is to be secure.
See "Chart 20: Passwords" on page 331 in Appendix A for a
programming overview.
Setting the SAPLUS password
The System Administrator Plus password is one to six digits long
and allows you to access all the programming needed to set up the
system for your company. The default password is
‡¤‡fi°‡, which spells SAPLUS on the keypad.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ four times. The display shows Passwords.
5. Press ≠. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Progrming pswds.
7. Press ≠. The display shows SysAdmin+:.
8. Press CHANGE and enter the new password.
9.
Press OK to accept the new password.
Erasing the SAPLUS password
If you leave the SAPLUS password blank (by entering no digits
in step 8), the password is erased. If you erase the password,
anyone can enter programming without a password.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Passwords 173
Setting the Administrator password
The Administrator password is one to six digits long and allows
you to access programming. The default password is
¤‹fl›fl, which spells ADMIN on the keypad.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ four times. The display shows Passwords.
5. Press ≠. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press ‘. The display shows Progrming pswds ˆ.
7. Press ≠ until the display shows Sys admin:.
8. Press CHANGE and enter the new password.
9. Press OK to accept the new password.
Erasing the Administrator password
If you leave the Administrator password blank (by entering no
digits in step 8), the password is erased. If you erase the
password, anyone can enter Administrator programming without
a password.
Setting the Basic password
The Basic password is one to six digits long and allows you to
access some programming settings using feature codes. You
cannot enter regular programming with this password. The
default is ¤¤‡›¤, which spells BASIC on the keypad.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ four times. The display shows Passwords.
5. Press ≠. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Progrming pswds.
7. Press ≠. The display shows SysAdmin+:.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
174 Passwords
8. Press ‘ until the display shows Basic:.
9. Press CHANGE and enter the new password.
10. Press OK to accept the new password.
Erasing the Basic password
If you leave the Basic password blank (by entering no digits in
step 9), the password is erased. If you erase the password, anyone
can enter Basic programming without a password.
Hospitality passwords
The Hospitality passwords are one to six digits long and allow
you to access some or all of the Hospitality Services feature
programming. There are two types of Hospitality services feature
passwords, the Desk admin password and the Room condition
password.
Setting the Desk admin password
The Desk admin password is used to access all Hospitality
Services admin features. The default Desk admin password is:
ÓØÍ∏ (4677). To change the default Desk admin
password:
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••Ç؈ÏÈÌ. The display reads
Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display reads Passwords.
5. Press ≠. The display reads COS pswds.
6. Press ‘ until the display reads Hospitality.
7. Press ≠. The display reads Desk pswd:4677.
8. Press the CHANGE display key. Enter a one to six digit number.
Press OK.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Passwords 175
Room condition password
The Room condition password controls the ability to change the
room condition with ≤°‡fl. The default room condition
password is: None. Different from the Desk admin password, the
room condition password can remain as None. To change the
default Room condition password:
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••Ç؈ÏÈÌ. The display reads
Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display reads Passwords.
5. Press ≠. The display reads COS pswds.
6. Press ‘ until the display reads Hospitality.
7. Press ≠. The display reads Desk pswd:4677.
8. Press ‘. The display reads Cond pswd:None.
9. Press the CHANGE display key. Enter a one to six digit number.
Press OK.
I-RAD password
The ability to do remote programming using the Internal Remote
Access Device (I-RAD) is protected by a password.
The default password is the eight-digit System ID number.
However, this password is not usable. It must be initialised by
British telecom (BT) with the Remote Access to Customer’s
Equipment (RACE). BT sets the password, then grants the
customer access once the customer registers their system. After
this, you are able to change the password as required. The
password is represented on the display by asterisks (*) and is
never displayed directly.
The remote administration software used with the I-RAD allows
you to use a password up to10 digits long. A longer password
does not work with the software. Your I-RAD password should
always match the password used with your Remote Set Tools
software.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
176 Passwords
Changing the I-RAD password
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Passwords.
5. Press ≠. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows IRAD pswd:*****
(displayed only after BT has initialised the system through
RACE with a password).
7. Press CHANGE and use the keypad to enter the old password.
8. Use the keypad to enter the new password.
9. Press OK to accept the new password.
10. Use the keypad to re-enter the new password for verification.
11. The display shows IRAD pswd********.
12. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Call services
• Erasing a forgotten Call log password.........178
• Programming Call services.........179
• 1st Display.........179
• Auto called ID.........180
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
178 Call services
Erasing a forgotten Call log password
If someone forgets their Call log password, you can reset it to
None so that they can set a new one. You cannot set a new
password using this method. You can only erase an existing one.
See "Call Log" on page 290 for information on setting a new Call
log password.
See "Chart 21: Call Log passwords" on page 332 in Appendix A
for a programming overview.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Passwords.
5. Press ≠. The display shows COS pswds.
6. Press ‘. The display shows Call log pswd:.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn:_.
8. Enter an extension number.
9. Press ≠. The display shows Log pswd:nnnnn.
10. Press CLR to erase the current Call log password.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Call services 179
Programming Call services
See "Chart 22: Call Services" on page 333 in Appendix A for a
programming overview.
1st Display
The 1st Display option allows you to choose what call
information is first displayed on an extension.
Depending on the services you subscribe to, Call Display
information may contain:
• the number of the caller
• the name of the line in your Compact Plus system that the call
is on
• or the name of the caller, if you have a system speed dial coded
with that number and a name.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The display shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Line access.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Call services.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Auto call info.
9. Press ‘. The display shows 1st Display.
10. Press CHANGE to choose Name, Numb, or Line.
On an incoming call, the display may show Unknown number if
the information is not available from your telephone company.
You may see Private number on the display if the caller blocks
that information.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
180 Call services
Auto called ID
This setting applies to Norstar/BST extensions only. ISDN
terminals can receive calling line identification automatically if
supported by the terminal.
The Auto called ID (identification) momentarily shows the
number of the called party on the display of a Norstar/BST
extension. The default is No, the Auto called ID is not displayed.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
5. Enter the extension number of the telephone you wish to
programme. The displays shows nnn:nnn.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Line access.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows Call services.
8. Press ≠. The display shows Auto call info.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows Auto called ID:.
10. Press CHANGE to choose N (No) or Y (Yes).
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Remote access
• Programming lines and features for remote access.........182
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
182 Remote access
Programming lines and features for remote access
Remote access packages
Remote access packages allow you to control the remote use of
Compact Plus line pools, the paging feature, administration, and
monitoring of the system.
You create a remote access package by defining which of your
system line pools it will be able to access and whether it can use
Page, line pools, and remote administration. You then assign the
package to individual lines (using Rem line access), and to a
particular Class of Service password.
Remote access packages defaults
Parameter
Square PBX
Hybrid
Package 00
Prohibits remote access to line pools, Page,
remote monitoring and administration. Cannot
be changed.
Package 01
Line pool access
Y for Pool A
N for Pools B and C
Remote Page,
administration, and
monitoring
No
Packages 02 - 15
Line pool access
N for Pools A to C
Remote Page,
administration, and
monitoring
No
You can use COPY and the keypad to copy settings from one
remote package to another.
The line pool access display shows an alphabetic line pool
identifier, followed by a numeric line pool access code in
parentheses (for example, PoolA (9):N). If no access code has
been identified, there is nothing between the brackets (for
example PoolA ( ):N). The line pool access code can be
programmed under Terminals&Extns.
Remote access package 00 is the default setting for the Remote
access package setting. It does not permit access to line pools or
to remote paging. Unlike packages 01 to 15, package 00 cannot
be changed.
You can define up to 15 remote access packages (01 to 15).
For remote users who call into the Compact Plus system to use
lines for calling out, the remote restrictions and line restrictions
still apply.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Remote access 183
To use features on a Norstar system remotely, press • followed
by the feature code. Even if you are calling from another Norstar
system, press • instead of ≤.
Line Pool access
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Remote access.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Remote access pkgs.
8. Press ≠ again. The display shows Show pkg:.
9. Enter the number of the package (00 to 15).
10. Press ≠. The display shows LinePool access:.
11. Press ≠ again. The display shows Pool A:.
12. Press CHANGE to choose N (No) or Y (Yes).
13. Press ® to exit or ‘ to move to the next line pool.
Remote page
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Remote access.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Remote access pkgs.
8. Press ≠ again. The display shows Show pkg:_.
9. Enter the number of the package (00 to 15).
10. Press ≠. The display shows LinePool access:.
11. Press ‘. The display shows Remote page:.
12. Press CHANGE to choose N (No) or Y (Yes).
13. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
184 Remote access
Remote admin
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Remote access.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Remote access pkgs.
8. Press ≠ again. The display shows Show pkg:.
9. Enter the number of the package (00 to 15).
10. Press ≠. The display shows LinePool access:.
11. Press ‘ until the display shows Remote admin:.
12. Press CHANGE to choose N (No) or Y (Yes).
13. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Remote monitor
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Remote access.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Remote access pkgs.
8. Press ≠ again. The display shows Show pkg:.
9. Enter the number of the package (00 to 15).
10. Press ≠. The display shows LinePool access:.
11. Press ‘ until the display shows Remote monitor:.
12. Press CHANGE to choose N (No) or Y (Yes).
13. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Remote access 185
Rem line access
Remote line access lets you assign a different remote package to
each line in your system.
L001 Rem pkg
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Hunt groups.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Remote access.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Remote access pkgs.
8. Press ‘. The display shows Rem line access.
9. Press ≠. The display shows Show line:.
10. Enter the line number or press LIST to see line 001.
11. Press CHANGE.
12. Enter the number for the remote package that will apply to the
line whenever it is used by a remote caller.
13. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
186 Remote access
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Auto Attendant
• Auto Attendant.........188
• System Answer.........188
• Custom Call Routing (CCR).........189
• CCR groups.........189
• Direct extension dialling.........190
• Customising System Answer and CCR.........190
• Turning System Answer on or off.........191
• Turning CCR on or off.........191
• Choosing the attendant telephone.........191
• Setting the number of rings before System Answer answers a
call.....192
• Setting the number of rings before a caller hears the CCR
greeting.....192
• Adding or removing extensions from a CCR group.........193
• Using the pre-recorded greetings.........194
• Using customised greetings for System Answer and CCR.........194
• Recording customised greetings for System Answer and
CCR.........196
• Programming or changing CCR destinations.........197
• Testing your custom System Answer and CCR.........197
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
188 Auto Attendant
Auto Attendant
The built-in Auto Attendant automatically answers and directs
incoming calls, which can reduce or eliminate the workload for
the person who answers incoming calls for an office. The Auto
Attendant carries out three tasks: System Answer, Custom Call
Routing (CCR), and direct extension dialling. The Auto
Attendant can transfer calls to a hunt group.
The System Administrator enables the Auto Attendant for your
Compact Plus and programs the lines answered by CCR. The
Auto Attendant is only enabled after you enter Software Keys
(supplied by BT). See "Software Keys" on page 57 for
information about this feature.
See "Chart 23: Auto Attendant" on page 334 in Appendix A for a
programming overview.
System Answer
The System Answer feature simplifies the job of answering calls
by ensuring all calls are answered within a set number of rings.
When calls go unanswered at the telephone monitored by System
answer (called the attendant extension), System Answer answers
the call and plays a greeting. It then puts the call on hold until
someone retrieves it.
If the caller knows the internal number they want to reach or is
using the Compact Plus remote feature, they can dial the number
during the System Answer greeting. If the caller dials the
extension number of the attendant telephone, the call is put on
hold. The greeting is not repeated.
System Answer monitors all external calls that appear as a
flashing line key on the attendant telephone, including answer
keys and external calls that have been transferred. After System
Answer has played the greeting, the call is put on hold at the same
line indicator where it first appeared. System Answer does not
answer calls from internal extensions.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Auto Attendant 189
Custom Call Routing (CCR)
The job of answering and transferring calls can be taken over by
CCR. When someone calls on lines monitored by CCR, the
system answers the call and plays your recorded greeting. Callers
using a tone dial set can then
• direct their call by pressing a digit as instructed by your
greeting (for example, ‘to reach our salespeople, press 4’)
• enter an internal telephone number (a fast way for regular
callers to reach someone directly)
• access remote features
• reach an attendant by pressing a single digit (a way to transfer
out of CCR and talk to someone who can direct their call)
Callers can also dial an internal number to reach someone who is
working after hours. If CCR forwards a call and it goes
unanswered because
• the caller entered an invalid extension number
• no one is there to answer the call
• the caller entered the extension number of the attendant
telephone
the call is redirected to ring at the Prime extension after the usual
Callback delay. Once a caller has dialled out of the CCR greeting,
they cannot make another selection.
CCR groups
CCR allows callers to reach groups of telephones by dialling a
single digit selected from an audio menu. Create the CCR groups
under the System programming heading.
When a call is sent to a CCR group in which all the telephones
have the same call forward programming, the call goes to the
telephone with the lowest internal number.
If the telephones in a CCR group have different call forward
programming, the call is handled by the telephone programming
that takes effect first. For example, if a telephone in a group
forwards after two rings, it forwards the call from CCR before the
telephones in the group that are programmed to forward after
three rings.
A CCR call is also forwarded by Forward on Busy, the Call
Forward feature code, and Callback programming. Be sure to
keep this in mind when programming the telephones in your CCR
groups.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
190 Auto Attendant
When a call that was handled by CCR rings at your telephone,
call information appears automatically on the display. You must
subscribe to a Call Display service and have the proper
equipment installed in your system for this feature to work.
Direct extension dialling
Both System Answer and CCR give the caller the opportunity to
dial an internal extension number or to use remote features such
as Direct Inward System Access (DISA). This means callers do
not have to wait to reach the person they are calling, and only the
person they are calling handles the call.
Customising System Answer and CCR
You enable System Answer and CCR for your system and
programme which lines can be answered with CCR (usually
incoming lines). System Answer is available to answer calls to
the attendant telephone (usually the reception telephone).
It is a good idea to plan how you will customise System Answer
and CCR before you start programming.
• Decide which telephone will be the attendant telephone
(where calls can be answered automatically and put on hold).
• Write down the greetings or scripts that you will record (see
examples in “Recording customised greetings for System
Answer and CCR” on page 196).
• Organise your telephones into groups and decide what number
a caller will use to reach each group. Using the groups and
numbers you have created, write down the greeting or script
that the CCR will play.
• Decide how many times a call rings before System Answer
and CCR answer. Be sure it will not conflict with voice mail
or other Auto Attendant applications you may be using. If
CCR lines ring at the attendant set, CCR and System Answer
can also conflict.
• Use a programming session and feature codes to create your
custom System Answer and CCR.
• Test both System Answer and CCR to make sure they are
working properly.
• Make sure you programme your system to use the Held Line
Reminder tone. This will provide another indication that
System Answer has placed a call on hold.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Auto Attendant 191
Turning System Answer on or off
System Answer can be turned on and off at any telephone in the
system. System Answer only handles calls that ring at the
attendant extension.
1. Press ≤•°‹⁄. The display shows the current status
of System Answer.
2. Press CHANGE or £.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN) or any password, including
the Basic password.
4. Press CHANGE to choose On or Off.
5. Press OK or • to confirm the change.
Because System Answer answers calls and then puts them on
hold, the feature should be turned off when no one is at the
telephone to retrieve the calls.
You can programme the feature code for turning System Answer
and CCR on or off on a memory button with an indicator at the
attendant telephone. You know that the feature is turned on when
the indicator is lit at the attendant set.
Turning CCR on or off
1. Press ≤•°‹¤. The display shows the current status
of CCR.
2. Press CHANGE or £.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN) or any password, including
the Basic password.
4. Press change to choose Off, Bus. Open, or Bus. Closed.
5. Press OK or • to confirm the change.
Choosing the attendant telephone
Programming allows you to choose a telephone to be the
attendant telephone. External calls that go unanswered at this
telephone are handled by System Answer.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
192 Auto Attendant
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠ twice. The display shows Attd extn: nnn
(the extension number of the current attendant telephone).
6. Press CHANGE and enter the internal number of the extension
you want to assign as the attendant telephone.
7. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Setting the number of rings before System Answer
answers a call
If the system is busy answering calls, the line rings until System
Answer can retrieve the call.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Auto Attendant.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Attd extn:.
7. Press ‘. The display shows System answer.
8. Press ≠. The display shows After:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12
rings.
10. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Setting the number of rings before a caller hears the
CCR greeting
If the system is busy answering calls, the line rings until CCR can
retrieve the call.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘until the display shows System prgrming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Auto Attendant 193
5. Press ≠. The display shows Auto Attendant.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Attd extn:.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows CCR.
8. Press ≠. The display shows After:.
9. Press CHANGE to choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12
rings.
10. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Adding or removing extensions from a CCR group
The greeting you create for CCR tells a caller to press a number
to reach a group of extensions. You add or remove extensions
from these groups (CCR groups) programming.
You can have a total of nine CCR groups. Each group can include
up to 20 extensions.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ¤‹fl›fl (ADMIN). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows System prgrming.
5. Press ≠. The display shows Auto Attendant.
6. Press ≠. The display shows Attd extn:.
7. Press ‘ until the display shows CCR.
8. Press ≠. The display shows After:.
9. Press ‘ until the display shows CCR groups.
10. Press ≠. The display shows Show group:.
11. Enter the number of the group to which you want to make
changes. The display shows CCR grp 1.
12. Press ≠. The display shows Show extn#:.
13. Enter the extension number of the extension you want to add
or remove from the group.
14. Press CHANGE to select the status of the extension in the
group: Assigned or Unassgnd.
15. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
194 Auto Attendant
Using the pre-recorded greetings
Pre-recorded greetings can be used whenever System Answer or
CCR are turned on. Pre-recorded greetings can be turned off (not
erased) and/or replaced with user-recorded substitutes.
If a pre-recorded greeting is turned off, all SA and CCR features
that use that greeting will be affected.
When pre-recorded greetings are used, incoming callers at the
attendant telephone hear the System Answer greetings. Lines that
are set up to be answered by CCR play one of these pre-recorded
greetings. They are:
• All of our operators are busy.
• If you know the extension that you want, and are using a
touch-tone telephone, please dial it now.
• Or, hold the line and your call will be answered as soon as
possible.
• Thank you for calling.
‘Thank you for calling’ is heard when the caller does not respond
to the CCR business closed greeting after it has been repeated,
just before the system disconnects the caller.
Using customised greetings for System Answer and
CCR
Compact Plus permits users to make their own voice recordings
for all the greetings used in System Answer and Custom Call
Routing. A combination of pre-recorded greetings and userrecorded greetings can also be used to tell callers how their call is
being handled.
For customer greetings, users can create their own version or turn
the greeting off completely. With system greetings, users can
select either the system version, their own version, or they can
turn the greeting off.
The following table lists the seven available recordings (A-G)
and the features that use them.
Greeting
User recorded example or
pre-recorded message if available (italics)
Source
A (Company
greeting)
You have reached British Telecom.
User
B (Business
closed)
Our offices are closed. Our business hours are
9 to 5, Monday to Friday.
User
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Used by
feature
SA
CCR
CCR
P0607114 Issue 01
Auto Attendant 195
Greeting
C (Caller menu)
D (Thank you)
User recorded example or
pre-recorded message if available (italics)
Source
Used by
feature
To reach sales press 1, to reach a receptionist
press 0.
User
CCR
Cheers.
User or
Thank you for calling.
Pre-recorded
Wait a moment and someone will pickup.
E (Hold the line)
F (Dial the
extension)
G (Operators
busy)
CCR
User or
SA
Pre-recorded
CCR
User or
SA
If you know the extension that you want, and are
using a touch-tone phone, please dial it now.
Pre-recorded
CCR
We can’t come to the phone right now.
User or
All of our operators are busy.
Pre-recorded
Or, hold the line and your call will be answered as
soon as possible.
You can dial through if you know the extension
number.
SA
Users have a total of 96 seconds of recording time to allocate to
the seven possible recordings. If a customer begins by recording
a 15 second Company Greeting, then there will be (96-15=81)
seconds available for the other remaining greetings.The
maximum length of a single recording is 32 seconds. If a user
exceeds the maximum time for a single recording, an error
message and a tone will be given.
A greeting that is turned off is not erased. The time used by the
greeting will not be returned to the 96 second time pool.
User recordings are stored on the feature card and the recordings
will be erased if the card is replaced. If the same card is removed
and reinserted, the greetings are preserved. The user will have to
re-record all user greetings when they upgrade to the new feature
card.
System greetings are permanent and can never be erased.
FLASH memory degrades slightly each time a message is
recorded. Typically, messages can be erased and written
thousands of times. However, care must be taken to plan out what
messages are to be recorded and how often, in order to reduce the
number of re-recordings made over a long period of time. A
warning will be given when the card has degraded significantly.
This warning indicates that a new card should be obtained.
The pre-recorded system messages do not use any portion of the
96 seconds of total recording time. They cannot be erased, but
they can be turned off or replaced with a user substitute.
For clear sound quality in your greetings, use the handset for
recording greetings (not the handsfree microphone).
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
196 Auto Attendant
Recording customised greetings for System Answer
and CCR
You can record your own versions of any user greetings and prerecorded greetings. You can also turn off any user or pre-recorded
greeting.
1. Press ≤•°‹‹and enter ¤‹fl›fl
(ADMIN).
2. The display shows Auto att. grtngs.
3. Press CHANGE if you want to turn the greeting off. A greeting
that is turned off is not erased. The time used by the greeting
will not be returned to the 96 second time pool.
4. Press ≠. The display shows Grtg A mode: User.
5. Press PLAY to play the company greeting (A).
6. Press REC to record a company greeting. As soon as you press
REC the previous recording will be erased. Making a
recording of less than two seconds duration will also erase a
greeting.
7. Press OK when you have completed your recording.
A company greeting is the first greeting your callers hear.
8. To continue recording messages, press NEXT, then REC to
record the business closed greeting (B).
9. Press OK when you have completed your recording.
Example: ‘Our business hours are 8 a.m. to 5 p.m., Monday
through Friday’.
10. To continue recording messages, press NEXT, then REC to
record the caller menu greeting (C).
The greeting used with the caller menu indicates the
destinations you have chosen for each digit.
Example: ‘To reach one of our sales agents, press 1. To
contact our accounting office, press 2. To talk to an attendant,
press 0. To repeat this menu, press *’.
11. Continue recording the remaining messages (D-G) if desired.
Remember that some greetings are shared by both SA and
CCR. Ensure that the recording is appropriate for both
features.
12. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Auto Attendant 197
Programming or changing CCR destinations
1. Press ≤•°‹‹and enter ¤‹fl›fl
(ADMIN).
2. The display shows Auto att. grtngs.
3. Press NEXT. The display shows CCR Tree.
4. Press SHOW. The display shows Dial 0: Att.
5. Press CHANGE if you want to choose Attendant, None, CCR or
grp. Press NEXT until the display shows Dial 0: and the
current destination when the caller presses zero.
6. Press CHANGE to select the appropriate destination.
Each number from zero to nine and * can direct a call to the
attendant telephone or one of the nine CCR groups. The * can
be set up to make the system play the CCR greeting again
(Repeat). If a digit is set to None, it has no destination.
7. Using NEXT and CHANGE, select the destinations for the
remaining digits.
Testing your custom System Answer and CCR
If you have more than one external line, you can call in to hear
your greetings by dialling the number used by external callers to
call the attendant set or a line that is answered using CCR.
To call systems with only one external line, you have to go to a
telephone that is not connected to your system.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
198 Auto Attendant
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Maintenance
• Beginning a Maintenance session.........200
• Checking the system version of the software.........201
• System Administration Log record.........201
• Clearing a hung line.........205
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
200 Maintenance
Beginning a Maintenance session
Maintenance overview
A Maintenance session helps you diagnose problems that may
occasionally arise within the Compact Plus system.
The Maintenance section of programming has four headings
available for System Administrator programming.
System version
Displays the version number of the System
Processor software.
Clear lines
Clears a hung line. See "Clearing a hung
line" on page 205
Sys admin log
Displays a list of system initialisations,
programming sessions, invalid password
attempts, and password changes.
Remote montr
Allows a technical specialist from a remote
location to monitor the Norstar system. It is
not a regular part of system installation or
maintenance.
You can run a Maintenance session from any working T7316,
T7316E, M7310N or M7324N telephone. Only one person at a
time can access a Maintenance session. Photocopy the System
Administration Log found at the end of this chapter, and use it to
record maintenance information.
Follow these steps any time you enter a Maintenance session:
1. Release all calls on your telephone.
2. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
3. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
4. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
5. Press ‘ until the display shows Maintenance.
When necessary, refer back to these five steps on how to begin a
Maintenance programming session. Only one person at a time
can access a Maintenance session.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Maintenance 201
Checking the system version of the software
System version tells you the version number of the system
processor software found in the Feature cartridge. The release
version can be used to trace a software fault if one occurs. Write
the system processor version number in the maintenance records.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Maintenance.
5. Press ≠. The display shows System version.
6. Press ≠. The display shows the version number of
the system processor.
7. Write the system processor version number in the appropriate
maintenance record.
8. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
System Administration Log record
You can check under the Sys admin log heading to find a list of
administrative events performed on Compact Plus. Use the
following table to record these log items whenever you run a
Maintenance session.
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
3. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS). The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
4. Press ‘ until the display shows Maintenance.
5. Press ≠. The display shows System version.
6. Press ‘ until the display shows Sys admin log.
7. Press ≠. The display shows Items in log:.
8. Press ‘ and “ to move down or up the list
of event codes.
9. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
202 Maintenance
System Administration Log
Sys admin log
Log item
Time of log item
Number of repetitions
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Time and date that log
was checked
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
:
/
/
P0607114 Issue 01
Troubleshooting
• Recording and reporting alarm codes.........204
• Clearing lines.........204
• Power failure.........205
• Power-fail telephone.........206
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
204 Troubleshooting
Recording and reporting alarm codes
Occasionally, you may encounter a problem with your Compact
Plus system either from internal or external causes.
You need to know the following:
• the alarm extension that displays messages when there are
problems
• how to recognise and clear hung lines
• when a power failure occurs and what happens with the
system
When there is a problem, the Compact Plus system generates a
message called an alarm code on the Alarm extension. You assign
a T7316, T7316E, M7310N or an M7324N telephone to be the
alarm extension (they have two-line displays).
If an alarm code appears on the Alarm extension’s display
1. Record the alarm code.
2. Press TIME and record the time displayed.
3. Call the Advice Line and report the alarm code.
4. After speaking to the support person, press CLEAR.
Clearing lines
A line is hung when it remains busy, even when no conversation
or data communication is taking place and it cannot be
disconnected by normal means. Lines can become hung when
exchange lines are connected to AC15A private circuits. Lines
connected to a device such as an answering machine, a fax
machine, or a modem can also become hung.
It is a matter of judgement to decide whether a line is hung or
simply in use. When a line is busy, you see a solid indicator next
to the line key and the message, Line in use, when you attempt
to select the line.
If a line is the only line in a line pool, and it is busy, a solid
indicator appears next to the line pool key and the message,
No free lines, appears on the display. For a line that is one of
several lines in a line pool, there is no direct indication that the
line is busy as long as other lines in the line pool are free. The
indicator next to the line pool key and the No free lines
message appear only when all lines in a line pool are busy. If one
or more lines in a line pool become hung, these busy indications
appear with greater frequency than usual.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Troubleshooting 205
Note: If you ensure that all lines assigned to line pools appear
individually on at least one telephone in the system, it is
much easier to detect hung lines.When lines become hung
as a result of a call being directed into or through your
system on a private circuit, they become hung in pairs. The
hung line pair consists of one private circuit and one
exchange line or private circuit. If network lines become
hung regularly, this indicates a problem with your network
configuration.
Clearing a hung line
1. Place the programming overlay over the appropriate keys on
your programming telephone.
2. Check the line number of the hung line using ≤ •‚ (the
Key Inquiry feature).
3. Press ≤••¤flfl‹›› (CONFIG). The
display shows Password:.
4. Press ‡¤‡fi°‡ (SAPLUS).The display shows
Terminals&Extns.
5. Press ‘ until the display shows Maintenance.
6. Press ≠. The display shows System version.
7. Press ‘. The display shows Clear lines.
8. Press ≠. The display shows the number of the first
busy line in the system, followed by the time in hours and
minutes that the line has been busy. If there are no hung lines,
the display shows No busy lines for a short time, then
Clear lines.
9. If this is not the line you want to clear, press ‘ until
the line you want to clear is displayed.
10. Press CLEAR to disconnect the line. The display confirms that
the line has been cleared.
11. Press ® to exit or ‘ to continue programming.
Power failure
If the power fails, your Compact Plus system maintains its
programming for a period of three days. Telephones also keep
their personal programming. The clock always needs to be set to
the correct time after a power failure.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
206 Troubleshooting
Power-fail telephone
Each analogue line card, installed in either the Compact Plus
Central Control Unit (CCU) or a Line Module, provides one
power-fail telephone connection at the Box Connection.
ATTENTION!
power-fail lines not supported
The following line cards do not support power-fail telephone lines:
NTBB1202: LM with auto-ranging power supply
These versions of LMs do not support emergency telephones.
NTBB20AD-93 UK Class B LM
NTBB20AE-93 Australia LM
NTBB20FD-93 Eng/Fr LM
NTBB20FF-93 Cala LM
NTBB20FG-93 International LM
The power-fail telephone is an analogue telephone (not a Norstar
telephone) that functions independently of the Compact Plus
system. You can use the power-fail telephone only when your
Norstar system is disconnected or without power. The power-fail
telephone is usually located near the Compact Plus CCU. If there
is no power-fail telephone next to the CCU, plug a standard
analogue telephone into the power-fail telephone socket located
near the CCU.
The power-fail telephone facility is not supported on a BRI loop.
Norstar customers with digital exchange lines who require
power-fail telephones, have the following options:
• Add analogue exchange lines to the system.
• Install an uninterruptable power supply (UPS) stand-by power
unit for the Compact Plus.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
SECTION III: Using telephone features
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
208
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
About your system telephones
• T7316E Business Series Terminals and KIMs.........210
• T7316 Business Series Terminal key defaults.........213
• M7324N telephone and CAPN.........214
• M7310N telephone.........215
• M7208N/T7208 telephones.........216
• M7100N/T7100 telephones.........217
• M7000/T7000 telephones.........217
• Release key.........218
• Visually Impaired Operator Console.........218
• Common feature display messages.........219
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
210 About your system telephones
Your Norstar telephone system is simple and flexible. You can
use many features with just a few key presses and view what is
happening by reading the telephone display. You can choose
which of its features you want to have available, make them work
the way that suits you best, and assign the features you use
frequently to the keys on your telephone.
The current time and date appear on the display of idle
Norstar/BST telephones.
T7316E Business Series Terminals and KIMs
The T7316E BST telephone has a two-line display, three display
keys, 16 memory keys with indicators, eight memory buttons
without indicators.
This keystation has handsfree ability, accessed from a button
located under the dialpad. Also under the dial pad are a mute key
that mutes for all features, and a headset key which allows the
user to attach a headset and direct the call to the headset or the
handset without needing to disconnect the headset.
Line numbering starts on button 09.
T7316E
The default button assignments for the T7316E depend on the
template applied. Refer to your Programming Records to identify
the current button programming for each telephone or group of
telephones.
T7316E BST upper buttons (PBXtemplate)
PBX template
01 ∫Contrast
02 ∫Show Time
03
04
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
05
06
07 ∫Send Msg
08 ∫Speed dial
P0607114 Issue 01
About your system telephones 211
Hybrid template
Square template
01 ∫Contrast
02 ∫Show Time
03 ∫Privacy
04
01 ∫Contrast
02 ∫Show Time
03 ∫Privacy
04 ∫
05 ∫Saved No.
06 ∫Sys Park
07 ∫Send Msg
08 ∫Speed dial
05 ∫Svd N redial
06 ∫Sys Park
07 ∫Send Msg
08 ∫Speed dial
T7316E BST lower buttons
PBX template
09 ∫Sys Park
10 ∫Saved No.
11 ∫Call Fwd
12 œ
13 π
14 †
15 ∫Time/Date
16 ∫Receive msg
17 ∫Call Timer
18 ∫Ring Again
19 ∂
20 ç
21 µ
22 ≈
23 ∆
24 ∆
Square template
09 ∫Line<xx>
10 ∫Line<xx>
11 ∫Line<xx>
12 ∫Line<xx>
13 π
14 †
15 ∫Time/Date
16 ∫Receive msg
Hybrid template
17 ∫Call Timer
18 ∫Ring Again
19 ∂
20 ç
21 µ
22 ≈
23 ∆
24 ∆
09 ∫Line<xx>
10 ∫Line Pool
11 ∫Call Fwd
12 œ
13 π
14 †
15 ∫Time/Date
16 ∫Receive msg
17 ∫Call Timer
18 ∫Ring Again
19 ∂
20 ç
21 µ
22 ≈
23 ∆
24 ∆
Central Answering Position (CAP)
The T7316E can be used alone or you can expand feature and line
button capacity by adding one or more Key Indicator Modules
(KIM). Each KIM has 24 buttons with indicator displays.
T7316E with KIM
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
212 About your system telephones
A KIM that is configured to support line and hunt group
appearances is called an eKIM. A T7316E supports a maximum
of four eKIMs.
A KIM that is not configured in system programming does not
support lines. This type of module is called an OKIM. A T7316E
can support a maximum of nine OKIMs. You need to add a
system power supply (SPS) if you install five or more OKIMs on
a T7316E.
The CAPN is usually the Prime extension and the Direct-Dial
telephone for the lines and telephones it serves.
The T7316E telephone displays a set of icons in place of flashing
arrows when it is connected to a system with version 5 or newer
software. If you connect a T7316E telephone to a system that is
running previous versions, the standard line indicators display.
The KIM also displays these icons. Note that the KIM is only
supported by version 5 and later software.
,
Active call
The line is active and/or you are connected
to this telephone.
Ringing
A call is coming into this line.
Hold
The call on this line is on Hold at this
telephone.
Call forward
The call on this line has been forwarded.
Active button
The feature assigned to this button is
active. Also used by Do Not Disturb.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
About your system telephones 213
T7316 Business Series Terminal key defaults
The T7316 telephone has a two-line display, three display keys,
16 memory keys with indicators, eight memory keys without
indicators, and Handsfree capability.
The default button assignments for the T7316 Business Series
Terminal (BST) depend on the template applied.
Refer to the Programming Record to identify the current button
programming for each set or group of sets.
T7316 telephone
Upper level programming keys
Lower level programming buttons
Note the button numbering for the upper buttons of this set. They
are mapped to the button settings from the M7310 telephone
which has a set of dual-memory buttons without displays.
However, since there is no second level of memory for the
buttons on this set, the button numbers are not consecutive.
These examples show defaults for a system with three-digit
internal numbers. The defaults do not actually exist on any
telephone, as no telephone has an autodial button for itself. The
position that would be taken by the autodial button for itself, is
blank.
T7316 BST upper buttons
P0607114 Issue 01
Button 23 ∫Set 227
Button 31 ∫Set 231
Button 25 ∫Set 228
Button 33 ∫Set 232
Button 27 ∫Set 229
Button 24 ∫Set 239
Button 29 ∫Set 230
Button 26 ∫Set 240
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
214 About your system telephones
T7316 BST lower buttons
Button #/
Function
Square template
Button #/
Function
11 ∫Set 221
17 ∫Set 224
13 ∫Set 222
19 ∫Set 225
15 ∫Set 223
01 ∫Line 1
02 ∫Line 2
03 ∫Call Fwd
04 œ
05 π
21 ∫Set 226
06 ç
07 µ
08 ≈
09 ∆
10 ∆
PBX template
Hybrid template
11 ∫Set 221
17 ∫Set 224
11 ∫Set 221
17 ∫Set 224
13 ∫Set 222
19 ∫Set 225
13 ∫Set 222
19 ∫Set 225
15 ∫Set 223
01 ∂
02 †
03 ∫Call Fwd
04 œ
05 π
21 ∫Set 226
06 ç
07 µ
08 ≈
09 ∆
10 ∆
15 ∫Set 223
01 ∫Line 1
02 ø
03 ∫Call Fwd
04 œ
05 π
21 ∫Set 226
06 ç
07 µ
08 ≈
09 ∆
10 ∆
M7324N telephone and CAPN
The M7324N telephone has a two-line display, three display
keys, 24 memory keys with indicators, and Handsfree capability.
M7324N memory key assignments
Square
∫Line 1
∫Call Fwd
∫Conf
∫Line 2
∫Spd Dial
†
Hybrid
∫Line 1
Blank
∫Line Pool
µ ∂ Blank
∫Save No.
œ Blank
Blank
Blank
∫Vce Call
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
π Blank
∆ Blank
∆ Blank
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
PBX
Blank
∫Call Fwd
∫Conf
∫Spd Dial
µ
† Blank
∂ Blank
∫Save No.
Blank
œ Blank ∫Save No.
Blank Blank
∫Vce Call
œ
Blank
π Blank Blank
∆ Blank Blank
∆ Blank Blank
π
∆
∆
Blank
Blank
∫Call Fwd
∫Conf
∫Spd Dial
†
µ
∂
∫Vce Call
P0607114 Issue 01
About your system telephones 215
Central Answering Position (CAPN)
The Central Answering Position telephone (CAPN) is a Norstar
M7324N telephone connected to at least one CAPN module. The
CAPN module is an add-on device that provides 48 extra memory
or line keys. You can connect one or two CAPN modules to an
M7324N telephone.
The CAPN is usually the Prime extension and the Direct-Dial
telephone for the lines and telephones it serves.
M7324N telephone
CAPN mod-
The CAPN module key mapping is the same for all templates. All
keys are blank keys by default.
M7310N telephone
The M7310N telephone has a two-line display, three display
keys, 10 memory keys with indicators, 12 dual-memory keys
without indicators, and Handsfree capability.
M7310N memory key assignments
P0607114 Issue 01
Square
Hybrid
PBX
∫Line 1
∫Line 1
∫Line Pool
∫Line 2
∫Line Pool
∫Conf/tran
∫Line 3
∫Call Fwd
∫Call Fwd
∫Line 4
œ
œ
∫Spd Dial
∫Spd Dial
∫Spd Dial
∂
∂
∂
µ
µ
µ
π
π
π
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
216 About your system telephones
M7310N key assignments for dual-memory keys (all templates)
8 x 24 system
8 x 16 system
∫Extn 233
∫Extn 221
∫Extn 240
∫Extn 227
∫Extn 233
∫Extn 221
Blank
∫Extn 227
∫Extn 234
∫Extn 222
∫Extn 241
∫Extn 228
∫Extn 234
∫Extn 222
Blank
∫Extn 228
∫Extn 235
∫Extn 223
∫Extn 242
∫Extn 229
∫Extn 235
∫Extn 223
Blank
∫Extn 229
∫Extn 236
∫Extn 224
∫Extn 243
∫Extn 230
∫Extn 236
∫Extn 224
Blank
∫Extn 230
∫Extn 237
∫Extn 225
∫Extn 244
∫Extn 231
∫Extn 237
∫Extn 225
Blank
∫Extn 231
∫Extn 239
∫Extn 226
∫Extn 245
∫Extn 232
Blank
∫Extn 226
Blank
∫Extn 232
The defaults shown
may not actually occur
on any telephone, as
no telephone has an
Autodial key for itself.
The extension number
for each telephone
appears as a blank
key on that telephone.
Extension number
238 does not appear
because it is assigned
to the I-RAD.
M7208N/T7208 telephones
These telephones have a single-line display, eight memory keys
with indicators, and Handsfree capability.
M7208N
T7208
M7208N memory key assignments
Square
Hybrid
PBX
∫Line 1
∫Line 1
∫Line Pool
∫Line 2
∫Line Pool
œ
µ
µ
µ
π
π
π
∫Spd Dial
∫Spd Dial
∫Spd Dial
∫Conf/tran
∫Conf/tran
∫Conf/tran
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
∆
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
About your system telephones 217
M7100N/T7100 telephones
These telephones have a single-line display and a single memory
key with no indicator.
M7100N
T7100
Because these telephones do not have any line keys, some of the
system features work slightly differently from the other
telephones.
Where other telephones may require you to select a line key to
answer a call, on these telephones you simply pick up the handset.
Where other telephones require you to select a line key to take a
call off hold, on these telephones you simply press ≥.
There is no handsfree or mute key on this set.
Throughout this book and supporting documents, you will find
special instructions for the M7100N and MT7100 telephones in
some feature descriptions.
The one feature key on these sets default to Last Number Redial.
Key assignment (all templates)
µ
M7000/T7000 telephones
M7000/T7000 telephones do not have a display or line keys. To
answer a call with these telephones, lift the handset. To place a
call on hold you press the ≥ key. Press ≥ again
to reconnect the held call. These telephones do not have
Handsfree/Mute capability.
The M7000/T7000 telephones are commonly used with the
Hospitality Services feature.
Refer to ‘Programming M7000/T7000 memory keys’ on
page 227 for a detailed steps for programming the four memory
keys on this telephone.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
218 About your system telephones
Release key
Pressing ® ends a call. You do not have to put the handset
down. ® also ends feature programming. While you are on a
call, do not press ® to end a feature you are using. If you do,
you disconnect the call. Press ≤ instead.
Visually Impaired Operator Console
The Compact Plus system supports a Visually Impaired Operator
Console (VIOC) for the visually impaired attendant. The VIOC
provides computer-based speech synthesis for the programming
interface. A VIOC consists of an M7324N telephone, a CAPN
module, an IBM-compatible PC, a PCI-B card, a PC-based voice
synthesizer card, and an analogue mixer card.
The PC uses the PCI-B to obtain information from the Central
Control Unit (CCU) and controls the voice synthesizer to
generate audible prompts. The synthesizer output is routed to a
headset where it is coupled with the telephone call in progress,
enabling the operator to respond to the caller and to hear status
information at the same time.
The PCI-B is an add-on card for the PC that allows applications
running on the PC to access the Compact Plus D-channel
signalling and B-2 data channels. The VIOC requires D-channel
signals.
The voice synthesizer card is an add-on for the PC that is capable
of performing text-to-speech synthesis. The volume and speed of
the synthesized speech can be adjusted by the user.
The analogue mixer card is an add-on for the PC that takes the
analogue signal from the voice synthesizer and mixes it with the
headset audio output from the M7324N extension. The result is
sent to the headset port of the mixer card. The mixer card does not
provide any volume control.
To use the VIOC function, the display language needs to be set to
Operating. See ‘Changing the display language’ on page 115 for
instructions.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
About your system telephones 219
Common feature display messages
You may see the following displays when using a feature :
P0607114 Issue 01
Access denied
Someone is already using programming, or the
feature you are trying to use is not compatible
with the configuration of the telephone or line.
Denied in admin
You have tried to use a feature, but you have not
been given access to it in programming.
Feature timeout
You have taken more than 15 seconds to press
a button in response to a display.
Inactive feature
You have entered a feature code that is used by
an application programme that your system does
not have.
Invalid code
You have entered an invalid feature code.
Not available
You have tried to use a feature that is not
available in the present set-up of your Compact
Plus system.
Set locked
You cannot use the feature you have chosen
because your telephone is locked. See ‘Locking
an extension’ on page 93.
1234567890123…
VIEW‚ OK
Press £ or press VIEW‚or ·VIEW to view a
number that is too long to fit on the display. Press
≥ or OK when you are finished.
§
This indicates a long-distance call. (May be
available with Call Display services.)
239>221
Either you are receiving an internal call from
telephone 239 forwarded by telephone 221, or
you have an answer button for telephone 221
and an internal call from 239 is ringing on 221.
221
TRANSFER
You are connected to an internal call. Press
TRANSFER to transfer the call.
221 calling
You are receiving a call from telephone 221.
Call 221?
YES NO
You have received a Ring Again offer for a call to
an internal telephone. Press the flashing internal
line button or YES to call the number again. On
T7100/M7100N and T7000/M7000 telephones,
just lift the receiver. Otherwise, press NO or wait
30 seconds for the Ring Again offer to expire. For
an explanation of Ring Again, see ‘Using Ring
Again’ on page 284.
Camped: 221
CALLBACK
The person to whom you camped the call did not
answer it. The call has come back to you. Press
the line button or CALLBACK to reconnect to the
call.
Line001
TRANSFER
You are connected to an external call. Press
TRANSFER to transfer the call.
Line001>221
Either you are receiving an external call
forwarded from telephone 221, or you have an
answer button for telephone 221 and an external
call is ringing on that telephone.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
220 About your system telephones
You may see the following displays when using a feature :
Line001 transfer
The call on line 001 is being transferred to you by
someone else in your Compact Plus system.
Line001 waiting
A camped call is waiting. Press the line button or
use Call Queuing to answer the call. Press ≥
if you have M7100N/T7100 or M7000/T7000
telephones.
No calls waiting
You tried to use Call Queuing but no call was
ringing at your telephone.
No line selected
There is no call ringing at your telephone. If you
have a flashing line button but your telephone is
not ringing, press the line button to answer the
call on that line.
Not in service
The telephone to which you directed a call is not
in service or is otherwise unavailable. The call is
returned to your telephone.
Parked call
CALLBACK
No one answered the call you parked. The call
has come back to you.
Pick up receiver
You have used the Call Queuing feature without
picking up the receiver. Auto Handsfree has not
been assigned to your telephone. You must use
the receiver or press the key marked
Handsfree/Mute to answer a call.
Priority>221
BLOCK
You are receiving a Priority call. If you are on
another call, inform the person you are speaking
to that the call is about to be put on hold. Press
the flashing line indicator of the Priority call or
wait until the call connects automatically (in 8
seconds). The Priority call goes through when
you hear the next beep. Your active call is placed
on Exclusive Hold. It is reconnected
automatically when the Priority call ends (unless
you transfer the Priority call, in which case you
must press the line button of your original call to
reconnect). Use DND (≤°fi) or press
BLOCK to reject a Priority call.
Release a call
You have no free line buttons on which to receive
a call. Release one of your current calls and try
to answer the incoming call again.
Use line pool?
YES NO
You have received a Ring Again offer for a line
pool. Press the flashing internal line button or YES
to use the line pool. On M7100N/T7100 or
M7000/T7000 telephones, just lift the receiver.
Otherwise, press NO or wait 30 seconds for the
Ring Again offer to expire.
Hold or release
You cannot programme a feature button while
you are on a call.
Release calls
You have tried to use a feature while you were on
a call or had calls on hold. Release the call, or
calls, before using the feature.
Line in use
The line is in use. Make the call using normal
methods or wait until the line is free.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
About your system telephones 221
You may see the following displays when using a feature :
P0607114 Issue 01
No button free
You have tried to make, receive, or pick up a call
when no line button was available. Some
features also require you to have a button free.
Releasing calls can free up line buttons.
Make calls first
The feature you tried to use requires you to be on
an active call at your telephone. This display also
appears when information about a call has been
cleared by a system reset.
No free lines
All the lines or line pools available to the
telephone are in use. This display also appears
when you have tried to dial an external number or
use a feature that conflicts with the lines, line
pools, or Prime line used by the telephone.This
must be corrected by your Customer Service
representative or installer.
No line selected
The telephone has been set up to dial an external
number on a Prime line but the telephone does
not have a prime line. This must be corrected by
your Customer Service representative or
installer.
In use: 221
You have tried to programme redirection while
someone else is programming redirection. Only
one person can programme line redirection at a
time.
Incoming only
The line you are trying to use for redirecting calls
is for incoming calls only. Choose an outgoing
line.
9_
QUIT BKSP OK
Continue entering digits. Press the volume bar or
BKSP to delete incorrect digits. Press ≥ or OK
when you are finished.
Invalid number
You have entered an invalid line pool code or an
invalid destination code.
Line denied
You have selected a line that is private to another
telephone.
Restricted call
The destination you have chosen for Line
redirection is restricted.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
222 About your system telephones
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Customising your telephone
• Dialling mode.........224
• Display contrast.........225
• Key Inquiry.........225
• Moving line keys.........226
• Ring type.........227
• Ring volume.........227
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
224 Customising your telephone
Dialling mode
Norstar/BST telephones support three dialling modes. All three
methods let you dial a call without picking up the handset. The
special features of the Automatic dial and Predial settings are
available only when you dial without picking up the handset.
• Standard dial—You make a call by selecting a line and dialling
the number. If you have a prime line, it is selected
automatically when you lift the handset or press the key
labelled as Handsfree.
• Automatic dial—If you have a Prime line assigned to your
telephone, you can dial a number without selecting a line.
Your prime line is selected as soon as you start dialling a
number. Automatic dial does not work if your telephone has
no prime line or if the prime line is in use. Telephones
connected to an Analogue Terminal Adapter (ATA) cannot use
Automatic dial.
• Predial—Allows you to enter a telephone number, check it,
then change it before actually making the call. The call is not
dialled until you select a line or line pool or pick up the
handset.
You can predial external and extension numbers. You must,
however, select the correct type of line (external or internal)
for the type of number you have entered. If all the lines on your
telephone are busy, you cannot enter a telephone number. If
your telephone starts ringing while you are predialling a
number, you can stop the ringing by turning on
Do Not Disturb (≤°fi). This does not affect numbers
you are entering.
Setting the dialling mode of your telephone
1. Press ≤•°¤
2. Press £ or NEXT to choose Automatic dial, Predial, or
Standard dial.
3. Press ≥ or OK to select the displayed dial mode.
Note: Standard dial does not support dialling without lifting the
handset of M7100N/T7100 or M7000/T7000 telephones.
If you have either of these telephones, use the Automatic
dial or Predial modes for dialling without lifting the
handset.
Note: The dialling modes feature code cannot be programmed to
a memory key.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Customising your telephone 225
Display contrast
You can adjust the contrast on your telephone display to make it
easier to read.
1. Press ≤•‡. The display shows Contrast level 4.
2. Press a number on the keypad for the contrast level you want;
or if you have a two-line telephone, press UP and DOWN to
adjust the contrast.
3. Press ≥ or OK to set the new contrast level.
Key Inquiry
Ensure that the function of a key matches its label by pressing
≤•‚ and then the key to display its function. On the
M7100N/T7100 telephones, Key Inquiry shows your extension
number followed by the function assigned to your single-memory
key.
To find out your extension number, use the Key Inquiry feature
(≤•‚) on an intercom key.
Displays
P0607114 Issue 01
001 Line001
SHOW OK
The display shows the number and name of
the line. Press SHOW to view the redirection
status of the line.
123456789012345…
VIEW‚ OK
Press £ or press VIEW‚ or ·VIEW to view a
number that is too long to fit on the display.
Press ≥ or OK when you are done.
21 <SETNAME>
NEXT VIEW‚
The display shows the directory number of
the telephone and the assigned name.
Press NEXT to see the first line assigned to
ring at the intercom key.
<Feature name>
SHOW OK
The name of the feature assigned to a key
is displayed when you press the key. Press
£ or SHOW for additional information.
Press a key
EXIT
Press the key you want to check. Press
≤ or EXIT when you are finished.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
226 Customising your telephone
Labelling keys on the telephone
After programming a key on your telephone, you may wish to
label it.
Norstar M-series telephones also have key pre-labelled key caps.
When you are labelling or removing a key cap, activate Key
Inquiry (≤•‚) first so that you do not accidentally activate
a feature.
Note: On M7100N/T7100 telephones, Key Inquiry shows your
extension number followed by the function assigned to
your single-memory key. This is usually Last Number
Redial.
To remove a key cap, slip the fingernails of your index fingers
under each end of the key cap and pull up until it pops off. If you
do not have a printed key cap to replace it, you can write the name
in the blank label space beside the key.
The T-series telephones are labelled beside the buttons. You can
use Desktop Assistant to make changes and print a new label
card. Your system administrator can access this application from
the system CD or download it from
http://www.nortelnetworks.com (Customer Support/Software
Distribution, under Product Selection choose Desktop Assistant).
Moving line keys
You can move exchange lines to different keys on your telephone.
Use this feature to arrange your lines as you prefer.
1. Press ≤•°⁄.
2. Press the key you want to move the line from.
3. Press the key you want to move the line to.
4. Press ≤ or QUIT when you are finished moving lines.
Note: You also use this feature code to move hunt group
appearances.
Displays
Exchanged
The two keys you selected have exchanged
position.
Invalid location You have tried to move a line to a key that cannot
be used as a line key, such as an intercom key,
Handsfree/Mute key, or an Answer key.
Move line from:
QUIT
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Press the key of the line you want to move. Press
≤ or QUIT when you have finished moving
lines.
P0607114 Issue 01
Customising your telephone 227
Move line to:
QUIT
Press the key you want to move the line to.
Neither of the keys is erased. The lines, or the
line and feature, simply switch places.
Press a line
The key you are trying to move is not a line key.
If you are trying to switch a line and a feature,
move the line to the Feature key and not the
Feature key to the line.
Ring type
To help you recognise which telephone is ringing in an open
office, you can choose one of four distinctive rings for your
telephone.
1. Press ≤•fl.
2. Press 1, 2, 3, 4, or NEXT. You hear the selected ring for 2
seconds.
3. Repeat until you hear the ring you prefer, then press ≥ or
OK. The display briefly shows New ring stored.
Ring volume
1. Press ≤•°‚ to make the telephone ring.
2. Press the volume bar to adjust the volume up or down.
Programming M7000/T7000 memory keys
The M7000/T7000 telephones have four programmable keys.
Features programmed on the keys have the following restrictions:
• do not have a display for information or instructions
• do not have line or extension keys
External autodial
1. Press ≤•⁄.
2. Press the key you want to programme.
3. Enter the telephone number.
4. Press the ≥ key.
Internal autodial (DSS)
1. Press ≤•¤.
2. Press the key you want to programme.
3. Enter the telephone number.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
228 Customising your telephone
Feature access key
1. Press ≤•‹.
2. Press the key you want to program.
3. Press ≤ and the code you wish to programme.
Personal Speed Dial programming
1. Press ≤•›.
2. Enter the speed dial code.
3. Enter the telephone number.
4. Press the ≥ key.
Ring Type programming
1. Press ≤•fl.
2. Press 1, 2, 3 or 4 to select the Ring type desired.
3. Press the ≥ key.
M7000/T7000 tones
Since the M7000/T7000 telephones do not have a display you
will hear the following tones:
• stuttered dialtone for Do Not Disturb and Call Forward
• single, low frequency command input tone
• single, high frequency confirmation tone
The lamp shows a solid light if there is a message from a DirectDial extension or a Voicemail message for M7000/T7000
telephones.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Using personal features
• Background music.........230
• Do Not Disturb.........230
• Personal Speed Dial codes.........231
• Using Speed Dial.........231
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
230 Using personal features
Background music
If an external music source has been connected to your Compact
Plus system, this feature allows you to play music over your
telephone speaker.
Press ≤°fl.
The music pauses while you are making or answering a call.
To cancel, press ≤£°fl.
Do Not Disturb
Extensions that are members of a hunt group can temporarily
leave a hunt group by activating this feature. Hunt group calls
arriving while an extension is in Do Not Disturb mode will be
forwarded to the next member in the hunt group.
Stopping calls from ringing at your telephone using Do
Not Disturb (DND)
You can stop calls from ringing at your telephone by pressing
≤°fi. The display shows Do not disturb.
Only Priority calls ring at your telephone. A line key will flash
when you receive a call, but your telephone does not ring.
Refusing to answer a call
While you are on a call, you can refuse to answer a second call
(including a Priority call).
Press ≤°fi while your telephone is ringing.
Cancelling Do Not Disturb
Press ≤£°fi. The display briefly shows Allow calls.
Your telephone now receives calls normally.
Using Do Not Disturb
Once you turn Do Not Disturb on, calls are forwarded to the
Prime extension only if there is no other telephone on which the
line appears. If there is another telephone that shares the same
line, the call may be answered by that person.
Do Not Disturb also prevents voice calls from alerting at your
telephone. Voice calls are presented as normal intercom calls.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Using personal features 231
Personal Speed Dial codes
You can quickly dial external telephone numbers that have been
programmed onto Speed Dial codes. Speed Dial codes
• 001 to 255 are programmed for the entire system using the
settings under System Speed Dialing heading. These codes are
valid for any telephone that is allowed to use speed dialing
keys. See ‘Assigning a number to a System speed dial code’
on page 62.
• 256-279 may be programmed differently at each telephone by
the user. These can also be programmed by you as part of the
telephone programming, and changed by the user, as needed.
Speed dial numbers are generally subject to any call barring
restrictions that have been programmed in the Modular Plus
system.
Using Speed Dial
System Speed Dial programming allows you to assign three-digit
Speed Dial codes to the external numbers your colleagues call
most frequently. Personal Speed Dial programming allows
individuals to programme their own Speed Dial numbers.
Speed Dial numbers are subject to the same restriction filters as
regularly dialled numbers. You can programme system Speed
Dial numbers to bypass dialling restrictions.
Speed Dial numbers may include host system signalling codes.
Note: There is no difference between using Personal Speed Dial
and using System Speed Dial. They differ only in how you
programme them, and in the code range available for each
type.
Adding or changing Personal Speed Dial
1. Press ≤•›.
2. Enter a three-digit code from 256 to 279 that you want to
associate with a telephone number.
3. To include a line selection for this number, press the line or
intercom key. To select a line pool, press a programmed line
pool key, or press the programme key labelled Intercom, and
enter a line pool access code. On the M7100N and the T7100
telephone, you can only select a line pool.
4. Enter the number you want to programme.
5. Press ≥ or OK.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
232 Using personal features
Displays storing and dialling a Personal Speed Dial number
9_
CANCL BKSP OK
Continue entering the number you wish to
programme. You can change the number
by pressing BKSP or √. When
you are finished, press ≥ or OK.
Enter digits
QUIT OK
Enter the telephone number you wish to
programme exactly as you would if you
were dialling it normally. When you are
finished, press ≥ or OK. This message
appears only after you select a line or line
pool.
Error code:
Enter a three-digit number between 256
and 279 to select the code for
programming.
No number stored
There is no number stored on the speed
dial code you have dialled.
Program and HOLD
On the M7100N, M7208N, T7100 and
T7208 telephones, if you want to
programme a line or line pool selection for
this speed dial number, select the line or
line pool. Otherwise, enter the telephone
number exactly as you would if you were
dialling it normally. When you are finished,
press ≥.
Program and OK
QUIT OK
If you want to programme a line or line
pool selection for this speed dial number,
select the line or line pool. Otherwise,
enter the telephone number you wish to
programme exactly as you would if you
were dialling it normally. When you are
finished, press OK.
Select a line
There is no line associated with the speed
dial number you are trying to use. Select a
free exchange line or line pool, and enter
the speed dial feature code again.
Unknown number
The system cannot dial the number
stored.
Re-programme the number.
Speed dial>
Enter a three-digit number between 001
and 279 to select the code for dialling.
No free lines
LATER
All lines are busy. Press LATER, then YES to
have the system notify you when a line is
free.
Making a Speed Dial call
To make a call using a personal or System Speed Dial code:
1. Press ≤‚.
2. Enter the appropriate three-digit Speed Dial code (001-279).
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Answering calls
• Answering a call.........234
• Privacy feature (external calls only).........234
• Answering the next queued call.........235
• Answering hunt group calls.........235
• Multiple appearances of DIA lines.........236
• Using SWCA line buttons.........236
• Using Handsfree.........239
• Answering a telephone using Directed Pickup.........240
• Answering a telephone using Pickup Group.........241
• Answer keys.........242
• Listening in a group.........243
• Disconnecting accidentally.........243
• Malicious call identification (MCID).........243
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
234 Answering calls
Answering a call
When a call rings at the telephone, pick up the handset or press
the key marked Handsfree/Mute to connect the call.
Sorting calls by distinctive ring patterns
When lines are configured on your system, they can be assigned
one of four distinctive ring patterns (DRP). The default for all
telephones and lines is DRP-1, which is the highest priority.
Call ringing: When multiple calls are presented to the telephone,
the call with the highest priority DRP setting will be the call that
rings at the telephone.
Call answering: When multiple calls are presented to a
telephone, and the user picks up the handset, the call with the
highest priority DRP setting is the call that is presented.
Note: External calls always have a higher priority than internal
calls.
Note: If the ring type is changed on a telephone after the DRPs
are set on the line, the DRPs are overwritten by the telephone
settings. If the DRPs are set after telephone programming, then
the telephone ring programming is overridden by the DRP
program. Refer to ‘Ring type’ on page 227.
Privacy feature (external calls only)
Lines in your system can be programmed to have Automatic
Privacy. If a line is programmed with Automatic Privacy, only
one person at a time can use the line. If a line is not programmed
with Automatic Privacy, anyone with the line assigned to their
telephone can join your call by pressing the line key. Should
another telephone join your call, you hear a tone and see a
message on the telephone display. A telephone cannot join a call
without this tone being heard.
If a line is not programmed with Automatic Privacy, you can still
use the Privacy feature by pressing ≤°‹ after connecting
an external call.
Note: Privacy control cannot be used on internal or conference
calls.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Answering calls 235
Creating a conference by releasing Privacy
If a line is programmed with Automatic Privacy, you can turn
privacy off to allow another person with the same line to join in
your conversation and form a conference. All the rules applicable
to a conference apply, except there is only one line in use instead
of the normal two. This means that you cannot split a conference
that was set up by releasing Privacy.
1. After connecting an external call, press ≤°‹.
2. Tell the other person to press the line button and join your
conversation.
Only two system telephones in addition to the external caller can
take part in this kind of conference.
Answering the next queued call
An attendant who has many calls coming in at once can use Call
Queuing to help them answer the calls in order. When there is
more than one call ringing, you can answer the call that has been
ringing longest. If you are already on an incoming call, it is put
on hold and the next longest waiting call is automatically
connected.
1. After you pick up the handset, press ≤°‚⁄.
Answering hunt group calls
The three hunt group distribution modes allow you to customise
how hunt group calls are distributed in your office.
In Broadcast mode, a single incoming call will ring
simultaneously at all the extensions in a group. In a busy office
you might have three receptionists in a hunt group. Each
receptionist has a hunt group button on their telephone so
incoming calls alert at all three telephones, if available, and can
be answered by any one of the receptionists. The other two
telephones do not track the call.
The sequential distribution mode follows the programmed
member order when distributing calls. The incoming call starts at
the first extension in the hunt group and directs the call through
the hunt group members in order until a hunt group member
answers the call. The next hunt group call goes through the same
distribution process.
In this mode, you can programme your most experienced
personnel to be the first members of the group to receive
incoming calls.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
236 Answering calls
The cyclical distribution starts the call at the extension following
the one which was last presented with a call. So if extension 223,
224 and 225 are members 01, 02 and 03 respectively of a hunt
group and the last call was answered by 224 (member 02), the
next incoming call will start with extension 225 (member 03).
This way, you can ensure that all your personnel are receiving
calls, rather than one person receiving the majority of calls.
Multiple appearances of DIA lines
DIA lines can be assigned to one or more telephones. Calls on
DIA lines alert at all telephones programmed with appearances of
the DIA line. Once the DIA call is answered, the call is no longer
tracked by any other telephone with the appearance of the DIA
line, leaving the other telephones free to receive subsequent
incoming calls.
Using SWCA line buttons
System Wide Call Appearance (SWCA) can be assigned to up to
16 program buttons on each telephone in a group. This feature
allows a group of users to see and answer incoming calls on any
telephone in the group.
See ‘Changing the key programming for an extension’ on
page 112 for general information about setting or changing key
programming for a telephone. SWCA keys can be assigned to
memory keys using feature codes ≤•fi¤‚ to
≤•fi‹fi. See ‘Setting SWCA controls’ on page 143 for
information about determining how the system will assign calls
to SWCA keys, and how the Hold feature will perform for these
keys.
Note: Each group telephone must either have a line appearance
of the call coming in, or a free intercom button to be able
to retrieve a SWCA call from Hold.
The number of SWCA keys that can be assigned will
depend on available buttons on the telephone.
M7310N/T7316, T7316E, and M7324N telephones
provide the broadest use of this feature.
Companion, and M7100N/T7100 telephones do not have
line or intercom buttons, therefore, they cannot be
assigned SWCA buttons. However, they can be used to
park and unpark SWCA calls by entering the codes on the
dial pad to enter the SWCA code for a call.
Your system administrator configures the SWCA line buttons
during the initial configuration of your telephone.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Answering calls 237
Auto Hold
Your telephone must be set to have Full autohold if you want to
use SWCA lines so that a call automatically gets placed on hold
if the user answers a second call. If the telephone does not do this,
the user can change the system setting at the telephone using
≤‡‹.
Call Park
The Call Park access code must be active for SWCA buttons to
work. This means that it cannot be set to 0.
Incoming calls
When you answer a non-intercom call, the system can be set so
that calls are automatically transferred to the first available
SWCA key. Or it can be set to two manual states, whereby the call
does not get transferred to a SWCA line key until the call is put
on Hold. At that time, the system can be set to only associate the
call to that SWCA key while the call is on hold, or it can be set to
associate the call to that SWCA key for the life of the call.
As well, you can specify whether the call on Hold will display as
on hold on other telephones in the group, or only on the set where
the call originated. Calls on Hold on the originating set show
solid indicators beside both the line key that the call came in on
and the SWCA key. On all other telephones in the group, if
SWCA Hold is active, only the SWCA key has an indicator. A
solid indicator on telephones in the group means that the call is
being answered.
SWCA indicators, incoming call
Answering telephone
Other telephones in the group
Line 1
Line 1
Line 2
Line 2
SWAC1
SWAC4
SWAC1
SWAC4
SWAC2
SWAC5
SWAC2
SWAC5
SWAC3
SWAC6
SWAC3
SWAC6
P0607114 Issue 01
Intercom
Intercom
Intercom
Intercom
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
238 Answering calls
If you put the call on Hold, the line button it came in on is cleared
and the indicator beside the SWCA key goes to fast-flash. On
other telephones in the group, the indicator flashes slowly.
If the call is then retrieved at another telephone, the call shows an
appearance on the Intercom key of that telephone, and the
indicator beside the SWCA key becomes solid. On all other
telephones in the group, the SWCA key displays a solid indicator,
as well, meaning that the call is active on another telephone.
Outgoing calls
When you make an outgoing call using the intercom key on your
telephone, the call is automatically transferred to the first
available SWCA key. Solid indicators appear beside the intercom
button and the SWCA key on your telephone. All other
telephones in the group also see a solid indicator beside the
SWCA key, indicating that the line for that key is in use. If you
put the call on hold, the SWCA key indicator fast-flashes on your
telephone, and slow-flashes on the other telephones in the group.
The call can then be picked up by any other telephone in the
group.
No free call keys
If all the SWCA keys are currently occupied when a new call
comes in, you can still put the call on Hold.
• If a SWCA key has been freed up between the time you
answered the call, and when you put the call on Hold, the call
will transfer to the free SWCA key and act as described in
“Incoming calls” on page 237.
• If all SWCA keys are still occupied when you put the new call
on Hold, the call will be held at your telephone, on the line it
came in on. When a SWCA key becomes free, you can take the
call off hold and transfer it to a SWCA key so it has a groupwide appearance, then put the call on Hold again.
These principles also apply to outgoing calls.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Answering calls 239
Using Handsfree
Norstar/BST telephones allow you to make calls without using
the handset. The M7100N/T7100 and M7000/T7000 telephones
do not support handsfree operation.
T7208 and T7316 telephones have a separate Mute key. The
system assigns Handsfree to the bottom, right memory key, but
the Mute feature is assigned to the Mute key.
T7316E telephones have both a Mute and a Handsfree key, which
are located under the dial pad.
T7316 and T7316E telephones also have a Headset key which
allows the user to switch between using the headset and using the
other features, such as Handsfree, without need to remove the
headset.
Making calls without lifting the handset
1. If you do not have a Prime line assigned to your telephone,
press a line key.
2. Press the key labelled Handsfree. The telephone internal
microphone and speaker are automatically turned on.
3. Dial your call and speak at a normal level.
Answering calls without lifting the handset
1. Press the line key for the ringing call.
This step is not necessary if you have a Prime line assigned to
your telephone.
2. When your telephone rings, press the key labelled Handsfree
and speak normally.
Direct your voice toward the telephone. The closer you are to the
telephone, the easier it is for the microphone to transmit your
voice clearly to your listener.
Muting a handsfree call
You can switch off the telephone microphone so that you can
speak privately while you are on a handsfree call.
Press the key labelled Handsfree/Mute or Mute. The microphone
is turned off.
To turn the microphone back on again and continue your
handsfree call, press the key labelled Handsfree/Mute or Mute.
Note: The indicator next to the key labelled for Mute is solid
when you are in handsfree mode. It flashes when you mute
the microphone.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
240 Answering calls
Changing a handset call to a handsfree call
Press the key labelled Handsfree and hang up the handset.
Changing a Handsfree to a regular call
Lift the handset.
Hints for using handsfree
Wait for your caller to finish talking before you speak. The
microphone and speaker cannot be on at the same time. Your
caller's voice may be cut off if you both speak at the same time.
Noises such as a tapping pencil could be loud enough to turn on
your microphone and cut off your caller’s speech.
To prevent a possible echo, keep the area around your telephone
free of paper and other objects that might screen your
microphone. Turning down the microphone volume (press the
volume bar while speaking) also prevents echoes. When you
change the volume level, both the microphone and speaker
volume are adjusted to prevent feedback problems.
Place the telephone so that any unavoidable local noise (such as
an air conditioner) is behind it. This limits the amount of
disruptive background noise being transmitted.
In open-concept environments, use the handset when handsfree
communication is not necessary or when you need privacy during
a call. Another option is to use a headset.
Answering a telephone using Directed Pickup
You can answer any telephone that is ringing in your Compact
Plus system using Directed Pickup or Group Pickup.
1. Press ≤‡fl.
2. Enter the extension number of the ringing telephone.
Directed Pickup cannot be used to answer private lines.
To use Directed Pickup, the telephone must be ringing. If, for
example, the auxiliary ringer is ringing but the call is not ringing
at a telephone, the call cannot be answered using Directed
Pickup. It must be answered normally at a telephone that has a
flashing indicator for the call or by using Trunk Answer. You can
also answer a call that is ringing when someone has transferred
the call to a telephone and the call is ringing on an intercom key.
Directed Pickup can also retrieve calls that are ringing on an
Answer extension number. Although you may enter the extension
number of the telephone you hear ringing, it may be calls from
another telephone you are answering.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Answering calls 241
Answering a telephone using Pickup Group
Your Compact Plus system can be divided into four Pickup
Groups. If you are a member of a Pickup Group, you can pick up
a call that is ringing at any telephone in your Pickup Group.
Press ≤‡fi.
Note: Group Pickup cannot be used to retrieve a camped call.
If there is more than one incoming call at a telephone in a Pickup
Group, a call ringing on an exchange line is answered first,
followed by calls on the Prime line and, finally, calls on internal
lines.
Displays
Already joined
You are already connected to the
telephone that made the call you are trying
to pick up. This can happen if you are on a
call to a colleague, your colleague dials the
number of a telephone in your Pickup
Group, and you attempt to pick up that call.
Pickup denied
There is no call that you can pick up or the
call that was ringing has already been
answered.
You have tried to pick up a call on someone
else’s private line.
Pickup:
Enter the extension number of the
telephone that is ringing. (You may use an
internal autodial key to do this.)
If you decide not to answer a ringing call
after you have activated Directed Pickup,
press ≤.
Trunk Answer
The Trunk Answer feature allows you to answer a ringing call
anywhere in the system from any telephone in the system. The
line you are answering does not have to appear or ring at the
telephone you are using. Trunk Answer works only with calls that
are ringing on lines for which a Ringing service schedule is active
and if Trunk Answer is enabled.
Answering a call using Trunk Answer
Press ≤°‚‚.
If there is more than one incoming call on lines in a Ringing
service, the Trunk Answer feature picks up the external call that
has been ringing the longest.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
242 Answering calls
Displays
Line denied
You have tried to pick up a call on someone
else’s private line.
Pickup denied
The call that is ringing is on a line that is not
in a Ringing Service.
Note: Trunk Answer does not pick up calls that are coming in on
a private line.
Answer keys
An Answer key allows a telephone to answer calls intended for
another telephone. For example, an Answer key allows an
assistant to answer incoming calls to a manager’s telephone.
When installing your Compact Plus system, you assign
telephones to have Answer keys for other extensions. You also set
whether the incoming call for the monitored extension will ring
at the Answer key or simply activate the key indicator (ª or º
or
for T7316E telephones). A Norstar/BST telephone may
have up to four Answer keys to monitor other extensions.
M7100N/T7100 and M7000/T7000 telephones and ISDN
terminals cannot be assigned Answer keys to monitor other
extensions, but they can be monitored.
Each Answer key should be clearly labelled with the name or
number of the extension it monitors.
You cannot make calls using Answer keys.
If more than one call is ringing at someone’s telephone, the first
call appears on the attendant’s Answer key. Any subsequent calls
appear on intercom keys, if they are available.
More than one attendant may have an Answer key for a single
telephone. This allows two or more attendants to handle calls for
a busy person. Each telephone can handle calls for up to four
other people using separate Answer keys for each person.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Answering calls 243
Listening in a group
The Group Listen feature allows other people in your office to
listen in on a call without the caller hearing any noise from the
office by turning the telephone external microphone off.
1. Press ≤°‚¤. You hear the caller’s voice through
your telephone’s speaker.
2. Speak to the caller through the telephone handset.
To cancel the Group Listen feature during your call, press
≤£°‚¤.
Group Listen is cancelled automatically when you hang up.
You can switch a Group Listen call to handsfree by pressing the
key labelled Handsfree. To switch back to Group Listen, enter the
Group Listen feature code again.
Note: Keep the handset away from the speaker to prevent
feedback. Press ® to prevent feedback when hanging
up.
Disconnecting accidentally
If you accidentally drop the handset into the telephone cradle
while answering a call, you can retrieve the call by picking up the
handset. The system calls on the handsfree feature, which keeps
the call active.
Malicious call identification (MCID)
The MCID feature allows you to use ≤°·‡ to have call
information recorded on the central office system of the linesource provider for an incoming call on a specific line
(EUROISDN lines, only).
Note: This feature must be allowed in network programming to
work. Check with your system administrator.
Invoke the feature code without hanging up, and within 30
seconds (time varies on different networks) after the caller hangs
up.
The following information registers on the network:
• called party number
• calling party number
• local time and date of the invocation in the network serving the
called user
• service provider option: calling party subaddress, if provided
by calling user)
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
244 Answering calls
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Holding calls
• Holding.........246
• Listening on hold.........247
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
246 Holding calls
Holding
When you put a call on hold, the Compact Plus system maintains
the connection to the caller but the call is no longer active at your
telephone. The indicator flashes on all telephones that have
access to the line with the call on hold. The call can be retrieved
from any of these telephones.
If the call comes in on a DIA line, the indicator flashes at the
telephone that answered the call, leaving other telephones with
appearances of that DIA line free to take other incoming calls.
The call can be retrieved at the answering extension.
On M7100N/T7100 and M7000/T7000 telephones, ≥
alternates between two lines: one active, one on hold. These
telephones cannot retrieve a call placed on hold by another
telephone.
Answered hunt group calls can be placed on hold at the answering
extension.
To put a call on hold, press ≥.
To retrieve a held call, press the flashing line key of the held call.
Automatic Hold
If you are on a call and want to pickup another call at your
telephone, use Automatic Hold.
Press the line key of the caller you want to speak to. Your current
caller is put on hold automatically.
Exclusive Hold
You can put a call on Exclusive Hold so that it can be retrieved
only at your telephone.
Press ≤‡· or ≤≥. The line appears busy on all other
telephones, and the call cannot be picked up by anyone else in the
office.
Display
On hold: LINENAM
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
You have placed one or more lines on hold.
The name of the line that has been held the
longest is displayed. This feature works
with external calls only.
P0607114 Issue 01
Holding calls 247
Listening on hold
If you have been put on hold, Listen on Hold allows you to
replace the handset and wait to hear when the other person
speaks.
If Automatic Handsfree has been assigned to your telephone, you
can use the Handsfree/Mute feature instead of Listen on Hold.
Without handsfree
1. Press ≥.
2. Hang up the handset.
3. Press the line key of the call. You may hear indications from
the far end that you are on hold (for example, tones or music).
Your telephone microphone is off so no one at the other end
can hear anything in your office.
4. When the person you were talking to returns, you hear them
through your telephone speaker. Lift the handset and talk.
With handsfree
1. If using the handset, press the key labelled Handsfree.
2. Hang up the handset.
3. Press the key labelled Handsfree again. Your microphone is
off but you can hear when the caller returns.
4. When the caller returns, press the key labelled handsfree or
lift the handset.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
248 Holding calls
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Routing calls
• Call Parking.........250
• DIA calls.........251
• Making a Priority call.........253
• Transferring a call.........253
• Transferring to a busy extension (Call Camping).........254
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
250 Routing calls
Call Parking
Call Parking allows you to suspend a call so that someone else
can retrieve it from any telephone in the Compact Plus system.
You retrieve a parked call by dialling the retrieval code. As many
as nine calls can be parked at one time on the Compact Plus
system.
When you park a call, the system assigns one of nine codes for
retrieval of the call. These codes consist of the Call Parking
prefix, which may be any digit from 0 to 9, and a two-digit call
number between 01 and 09. For example, if the Call Parking
prefix is 4, the first parked call is assigned Call Parking retrieval
code 401.
The Compact Plus system assigns Call Parking codes in
sequence, from the lowest to the highest, until all the codes are
used. This round-robin approach means that a greater variety of
codes are used, which makes it easier for a call to reach the right
person when more than one incoming call is parked.
The highest call number (the Call Parking prefix followed by 09)
is used only by M7100N/T7100 and M7000/T7000 telephones or
devices connected to the system using an Analogue Terminal
Adapter.
You programme the Call Parking prefix and the time delay before
parked calls are returned to the originating telephone. External
calls parked for longer than the programmed delay are returned to
the Prime extension.
Answered hunt group calls are parked in the same manner as
other calls.
Call Parking can be disabled by your system administrator.
Call Parking can be disabled by your System Administrator. You
must have Call Parking active to use the SWCA keys.
Parking a call
1. While on a call, press ≤‡›. The display shows the Call
Parking retrieval code.
2. Use ≤fl‚ (the Page feature) or press PAGE to announce
the retrieval code displayed by your telephone.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Routing calls 251
Retrieving a parked call
1. Select an internal line on any Norstar/BST telephone.
On M7100N/T7100 and M7000/T7000 telephones, pick up
the handset.
2. Dial the Call Parking retrieval code (101 to 108).
The retrieval code for M7100N/T7100 and M7000/T7000
telephones is 109.
DIA calls
Direct Inward Access (DIA) allows BRA lines to use internal
lines to route incoming calls from the public exchange; the calls
pass directly to a Norstar/BST extension without operator
intervention. The internal lines 101 to 140 between the Norstar
CCU and the extensions are called DIA lines.
BRA lines must have Answer Mode programmed to Auto for
DIA. Outgoing calls can also be made on auto-answer BRA lines
if they are assigned to a line pool or appear on an extension.
The Compact Plus system handles simultaneous calls on DIA
lines. The number of appearances of a DIA line on an extension
depends on the Line assignment setting for that extension.
If the DIA line is programmed to Appr&Ring or Appr only, then
the extension can have as many simultaneous DIA calls as there
are DIA key appearances. If the DIA line is programmed to Ring
only then the extension can have as many simultaneous DIA calls
as there are Intercom keys.
Direct Inward Access on Loop-guarded or Earth Calling
lines
When an incoming call comes in on an auto-answer loop guarded
or Earth calling line that is not configured to answer with DISA,
the caller hears system dial tone. They can then enter a DIA line
public received number to dial direct to an extension, a line pool
access code to break out, or a remote feature code from a DTMF
telephone, if a suitable remote access package has been assigned.
Number of appearances
The installer programs the number of appearances for each DIA
line assigned to the extension. When an extension with an
appearance of a DIA line answers a call, other extensions with
appearances of that DIA line do not track the state of that call. The
other extensions are free to receive additional calls on the DIA
line while the first call is still in progress.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
252 Routing calls
By default the number of DIA line appearances is one. The
secondary appearance of a DIA line, is any appearance given to
an extension after the first appearance. There is a limit to the
number of secondary target line appearances in the system.
Automatically, the first DIA line (101) is assigned to the first
Start extension number of 5001, DIA line 102 is assigned to the
next extension number 5002, and so on. Also, the Received
numbers, as well as the Originating Line Identification number,
are automatically set to the extension number.
Received number
When the system automatically answers an incoming call on
auto-answer ISDN BRA lines, it matches these digits to a
Received number, and routes the call to the appropriate DIA line.
The installer programs the Received number length. A Received
number cannot be the same as another Received number or the
Auto number. It also cannot start with the same first digit as any
line pool code.
Busy tone for a Direct Inward Access line
You can program a DIA line to return busy tone or route a call to
the Prime extension for the line, if all extensions are busy.
When If busy is set to Busy Tone, the caller receives a busy tone.
When If busy is set To Prime the call is routed to the Prime
extension. If all intercom keys on the Prime extension are busy
the caller receives busy tone.
Busy tone with Do Not Disturb on Busy
When Do Not Disturb on Busy (DND) is turned on for an
extension, internal and network callers hear a busy tone. External
callers are transferred to the Prime extension.
If there are no available appearances of the DIA line and the DND
on busy feature is set to Yes for one of these extensions, the
second caller hears ring-back and the call is routed to the Prime
extension for the line.
If there are no available appearances of the DIA line and the DND
on busy feature is set to No on all extensions with an appearance
of the DIA line, the caller hears busy tone. When If busy is set to
Busy Tone the call is routed to the Prime extension if the DIA line
feature is set to Prime extension.
The If busy feature is a line feature and DND is an extension
feature. The If busy feature is activated when a call cannot ring at
any extension in the system.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Routing calls 253
The following table outlines the call scenarios when a DIA line is
busy, that is, there are no available appearances of the DIA line.
DND on busy
Yes
Yes
No
No
If busy
Busy Tone
Prime
Busy Tone
Prime
The caller
hears:
Ring-back, Ring-back, Busy Tone
If Prime is Yes call goes to call goes to
Prime
Prime
Ring-back,
call goes to
Prime
If Prime is No Busy Tone
Busy Tone
Busy Tone
Busy Tone
Note: DIA does not apply to ISDN lines that are programmed as
manual answer lines.
Making a Priority call
If the administrator has allowed Priority call for your extension,
you can make an internal voice call when the Norstar/BST
telephone you are calling is idle, busy, or has Do Not Disturb
activated. If you get a busy signal when you call someone in your
office, you can interrupt them. Use this feature for urgent calls
only.
Press ≤fl· or press PRIORITY. Wait for a connection, then
speak.
Note: A person who receives a Priority call while they are on
another call has 8 seconds to accept or reject the call. If the
person does not take the call, the Priority call feature puts
their active call on Exclusive Hold and connects your call.
If Call Forward is active at the telephone you are trying to
reach, your call is forwarded.
If the telephone receiving the Priority call is in a
conference call, the other two parties are automatically put
on hold when the Priority call is accepted.
If the extension is a hunt group, the Priority call is rejected.
Transferring a call
You can transfer a call to any internal or external number.
Depending on how the installer has programmed your system,
you may not be able to transfer a call on one exchange line to
another exchange line.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
254 Routing calls
1. Press ≤‡‚ or press TRANSFER.
2. Call the person you want to transfer the call to.
3. If you want to talk to the person you are transferring the call
to, wait for them to answer before proceeding.
4. When you are ready to complete the transfer, press OK or hang
up. (You do not have to wait for the person to answer.)
You can cancel a transfer and re-connect with the party you are
attempting to transfer at any time before the transfer is complete.
1. Press ≤£‡‚ or press CANCL.
2. If you are not re-connected, press ® and then press the line
key of the original call, which is now on hold.
Transferring to a busy extension (Call Camping)
You can send an external call to another extension, even though
all of its lines are busy, by camping the call. The Call Camping
feature is useful for people who process many calls, such as
secretaries or receptionists.
1. After answering an external call, press ≤°¤.
2. Dial the extension number that is the destination for the call.
Camped calls appear on a line key on the receiving telephone, if
one is available. If there is no line key available, you receive a
message on the display and hear camp tones. Each Norstar/BST
telephone can handle only one camped call at a time.
Displays
21 Camp max
CALLBACK
You tried to camp a call to a telephone that
already has a camped call. The call has
come back to you. Press CALLBACK or the
line key to re-connect to the call. On the
M7100N/T7100 telephone, just pick up the
handset.
21 DND
CALLBACK
The person to whom you redirected a call
has Do Not Disturb activated. The call has
come back to you. Press CALLBACK or the
line key to re-connect to the call. On the
M7100N/T7100 and M7000/T7000
telephones, just pick up the handset.
Camp denied
You have tried to camp an internal call.
You can only camp external calls.
Camp to:
CANCEL
Dial the number of the internal telephone
to which the call is to be sent.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Routing calls 255
Camped: 21
CALLBACK
The telephone to which you camped a call
did not answer the call. The call has come
back to you. Press CALLBACK or the line
key to
re-connect to the call. On the
M7100N/T7100 telephone, just pick up the
handset.
Line001 hung up
A call you camped has come back to you,
but the caller hung up before you could
re-connect.
Not in service
CALLBACK
The telephone to which you have camped
a call is out of service or is being used for
programming. The call has come back to
you. Press CALLBACK or the line key to reconnect to the call. On the M7100N/T7100
and M7000/T7000 telephones, just pick
up the handset.
Release a call
The line that the camped call is on is in
use, or that line does not appear at your
telephone. Release the line or release an
internal line.
Answering a camped call
While you are on a call, you hear a beep whenever there is a
camped call waiting. Press the flashing line key or intercom key
that the call is camped on. If your extension has no free lines,
finishing one of your active calls releases a line for the camped
call.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
256 Routing calls
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Making external calls
• Using an exchange code.........258
• Using line pools.........258
• Making a conference call.........259
• Using Class of Service passwords.........263
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
258 Making external calls
Using an exchange code
You can access exchange lines to make external calls by using the
intercom key and dialling the exchange code (the default
exchange code is 9).
The exchange code is generally used to make external calls on the
M7100N/T7100 or M7000/T7000 telephone, and on telephones
connected to an Analogue Terminal Adapter.
Using line pools
A line pool is a group of exchange lines that can be shared by
many telephones. You can use a line in a line pool to make an
external call.
The Compact Plus can have three line pools, and a telephone can
be programmed to access any of them.
A line pool access code is a number you dial to get a line pool.
The access code can be up to four digits long. You can have
several different line pools for your system, each one giving you
access to a different set of exchange lines. It is one way of sharing
lines across telephones in a system.
You programme the line pool access codes and give each
telephone access to a line pool.
Everyone in the office should have a list of the line pool access
codes for the line pools their telephones can use.
Using a line pool to make a call
1. Press ≤fl›.
2. Enter a line pool access code.
If you have a free internal line, you can make a call using a line
pool without entering the feature code first.
1. Select an internal line (intercom).
2. Dial the line pool access code.
If no lines are available in the line pool, you can use Ring Again
at the busy tone. You are notified when a line in the line pool
becomes available. See ‘Using Ring Again’ on page 284.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Making external calls 259
Programming a memory key with a line pool feature code
When you programme a key with the line pool feature code, you
must enter a line pool access code after the feature code. The
programmed line pool key accesses a specific line pool, not the
line pool feature. See ‘Using line pools’ on page 258 for more
information.
If you programme a key with an indicator to access a line pool
when all the lines in a line pool are busy, the indicator for the line
pool key turns on. The indicator turns off when a line becomes
available.
Making calls from an ISDN terminal
Note that ISDN terminals do not have line keys or intercom keys
as do Norstar/BST telephones. To make an outgoing call from an
ISDN terminal, access an exchange line by entering a line pool
code or a destination code.
Making a conference call
You can share a call with two other people (internal or external)
by forming a conference. Once a conference is established, any
one of the parties can hang up, leaving the other two connected,
unless the two other parties are on exchange lines. In this case, if
the person who created the conference hangs up, the other two
parties may be disconnected, or they may remain connected
depending on the equipment in use.Your system may be
programmed to prevent connections between one exchange line
and another.
To establish a conference call with two other Norstar/BST
telephones, a telephone must have two intercom keys assigned to
it. The keys appear starting at the lowest right-hand position, or
one key above that if the Handsfree feature is assigned to the
telephone.
The M7100N/T7100 and M7000/T7000 telephones do not have
keys for intercom key assignment.
Forming a conference
1. Make or answer the call with the first party.
2. Place that call on hold.
3. Make the call to the second party.
4. Press ≤‹.
5. Take the held call off hold. This is automatic on the
M7100N/T7100 and M7000/T7000 telephones.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
260 Making external calls
Allowing a colleague to join your conference
Normally your calls are private.You can turn Privacy off for a
call, allowing another person in your office with the same line to
press the line key and join in a conference or a two-way call.
1. While on a call, press ≤°‹.
2. Tell the other person to press the line key and join your
conversation.
Only two Norstar/BST telephones in addition to the external
caller can take part in this kind of conference.
Disconnecting one person from the conference
You can disconnect one party from a conference and continue
talking to the other.
On T7208, T7316, T7316E, M7208N, M7310N, or M7324N
telephones:
1. Press the line key of the call that you want to disconnect.
The call that you want to keep is automatically put on hold.
2. Press ®. The first call is disconnected.
3. Press the line key of the held call to speak to the remaining
person.
On a T7100, M7100N, T7000, M7000 telephones:
1. Press ≤£‹ to place one caller on hold.
2. Press ≥ again to put the caller you want to keep on hold.
3. Press ®. The first call is disconnected.
4. Press ≥ to speak to the remaining party.
Using Hold on a conference
If you use Hold on a conference, you can
• put the two other people on hold (they cannot speak to each
other)
• put the conference on hold (the other two people can speak to
each other)
• put one person on hold while you continue to talk to the other
person
You can re-connect to the conference by pressing either of the
held line keys. For M7100N/T7100 and M7000/T7000
telephones, press ≥.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Making external calls 261
Separately holding two calls
For all Norstar/BST telephones except M7100N/T7100 and
M7000/T7000 telephones, you can put the two people in a
conference call on hold independently so that they cannot talk to
each other.
1. Press the line key of one person. The other person is
automatically put on hold.
2. Press ≥. The second person is put on hold.
You can re-establish the conference.
1. Take one call off hold.
2. Press ≤‹.
3. Take the other call off hold.
Putting a conference on hold
You can put a conference on hold, allowing the other two people
to continue speaking to each other.
Press ≥.
You can re-connect to the conference by pressing either of the
held line keys.
Splitting a conference
You can talk with one person while the other person is on hold.
On M7208N/T7208, M7310N/T7316, T7316E, or M7324N
telephones:
Press the line key of the person you want to speak to. The other
person is automatically put on hold.
On a M7100N/T7100 and M7000/T7000 telephones:
1. Press ≤£‹. The first party is on hold.
2. Press ≥, if necessary, to switch parties.
Re-establishing the conference.
Press ≤‹.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
262 Making external calls
Removing yourself from a conference
You can remove yourself from a conference and connect the other
two callers through your Compact Plus system.
Press ≤‡‚ (the Transfer feature code).
When you remove yourself from a conference using the Transfer
feature and both callers are from outside your system, one of the
callers must have called you on a disconnect supervised line, or
the call is disconnected.
Sending Hookswitch or DTMF during a conference call
Either system telephone engaged in a three-way conference call
over a Network CLID or DS trunk can issue a hookswitch or
DTMF dialing request without leaving the conference.
• To hear DTMF tones on both telephones during dial, activate
Long Tones (FEATURE 808).
• To conference in someone through the trunk, use Link
(FEATURE 71)
Displays
3 parties only
You are trying to add a fourth party to your
conference call or to join two conferences
together. Release one call from the
conference before adding another, or keep
the two conferences separate.
Conf. on hold
You have put a conference call on hold.
Conference busy
You have tried to make a conference call,
but your system is already handling its
maximum of four conference calls.
Line001 21
TRANSFER
You are on a conference with the two lines
or telephones shown. You can drop out of
the conference and leave the other two
parties connected (Unsupervised
Conference) by pressing TRANSFER or
entering the Transfer feature code.
Press held line
You have activated the Conference
feature with one call active and another on
hold. Press the line of the call on hold to
bring that person into the conference.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Making external calls 263
Using Class of Service passwords
Class of Service (COS) passwords permit controlled access to a
system’s resources by internal and remote users. When you enter
a COS password at a telephone, the restriction filters associated
with your COS password apply, rather than the normal restriction
filters. Similarly, when a remote user enters a COS password on
an incoming Auto-answer line, the restriction filters and remote
package associated with their COS password apply, rather than
the normal restriction filters and remote package. The COS
passwords are programmed by either your customer sales support
officer or installer.
Users should memorise their COS passwords instead of writing
them down. COS passwords should be deleted when employees
leave the company. Typically, each user has a separate password.
However, several users can share a password or one user can have
several passwords.
Changing your COS password
You must enter a COS password each time you wish to make a
call that is normally restricted on a line or telephone.
Changing the restriction filters on a line or telephone
1. Press ≤fl°.
2. Enter your six-digit COS password.
The COS passwords allows you to define individual passwords
and determine the restriction filters and remote package
associated with each.
If you use your Compact Plus system from outside the office, you
may have to enter a COS password to gain access to the system.
Displays
(Blank display) Enter your password. It is
not shown on the display.
Invalid Password
P0607114 Issue 01
You have entered a password that is not
programmed into your system.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
264 Making external calls
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Making internal calls
• Making an internal call.........266
• Making a conference call.........266
• Accessing a Direct-Dial extension.........266
• Leaving messages.........267
• Paging.........270
• Remote paging.........270
• Voice call.........271
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
266 Making internal calls
Making an internal call
When you want to make or receive internal or private network
calls, make calls to hunt group extensions, or access exchange
lines through line pools, use the button labelled Intercom. A
telephone may be assigned up to eight intercom keys.
1. Press an intercom key or, on M7100N/T7100 and
M7000/T7000 telephones, lift the handset.
2. Dial the extension number or a line pool access code.
Making a conference call
To establish a conference call with two other Norstar/BST
telephones, a telephone must have two intercom keys assigned to
it.
1. Make or answer a call with one extension.
2. Put the call on hold.
3. Press the remaining intercom key and dial the second
extension.
4. Press ≤‹.
5. Press the held intercom key (step 2) to connect.
Accessing a Direct-Dial extension
Direct-Dial allows you to dial designated telephones in your
Compact Plus system or private network with a single digit. You
can have one Direct-Dial extension in your Compact Plus system.
A person whose extension is a Direct-Dial extension is usually a
receptionist for your entire office or for a particular department.
To access the Direct-Dial extension, enter the Direct-Dial digit
(the default Direct-Dial number is 0).
Note that ISDN terminals cannot use the Direct-Dial digit to
reach a Direct-Dial extension.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Making internal calls 267
Leaving messages
You can leave a message on the display of another telephone in
your Compact Plus system. Messages appear on the Norstar/BST
telephone display informing the recipient to call the person who
sent the message. Messages can only be sent within the Compact
Plus system. The message sent reads MSG. Analogue telephones
attached to an ATA cannot receive messages, but can send them.
Sending a message
1. Press ≤⁄.
2. On a telephone with a two-line display, press ADD. (This step
is not necessary on a telephone with a single-line display.)
3. Enter the extension number of the person you want to send the
message to. The person’s display shows MSG.
Cancelling a message
1. Press ≤£⁄.The display shows Cancel for:.
2. Enter the extension number of the person you sent the
message to.
Viewing received messages
You can receive up to four messages from different telephones.
On a telephone with a two-line display
1. Press MSG. The display shows nnn called (where nnn
represents the extension number of the caller).
2. Press NEXT to move through your messages.
On a telephone with a single-line display
1. Press ≤flfi. The display shows the first message you
received.
2. Press • or £ to move through your messages.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
268 Making internal calls
Replying to a message
You can call the person (or your voice message centre) who sent
a message while you are viewing the message.
On a telephone with a one-line display
Press ‚.
On a telephone with a two-line display
Press CALL.
If you wish to call your voice message centre using a line other
than the programmed line, exit your message list and dial the
voice message centre telephone number using normal dialling
methods.
Viewing the messages you have sent
On a telephone with a two-line display, you can view the
messages you have sent. You can send up to four messages to
different extensions. Each extension, including the prime
extension, can receive up to four messages from different
extensions, but only one message from any one extension.
1. Press ≤⁄.
2. Press SHOW to display your first sent message.
3. Press NEXT to move through your sent messages.
Displays
Cancel denied
You have entered an invalid number when
attempting to cancel a message.
In use: 21
You are trying to call from your message
waiting list. The line that you are trying to
use is being used by the identified Norstar
user.
Message denied
You have tried to send a message to an
invalid extension number or to a telephone
that is out of service.
Message list
SHOW ADD EXIT
SHOW appears only if you have outstanding
messages. Press SHOW to review messages
you have sent. Press ADD to send a new
message.
Message to:
Enter the extension number of the
telephone to which you want to send a
message.
Messages & Calls
MSG CALLS
You have one or more messages and one
or more new Call Logs. Press
≤°‚fl to change the first line of the
display to the current time and date.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Making internal calls 269
No key free
You have no line key free with which to
reply to a message.
Start of list
NEXT
Your are at the beginning of your list of
messages. Press NEXT to move through
your messages.
Their list full
You are trying to send a message to a user
whose message waiting list is full.
Your list full
You have tried to send a message but your
telephone’s list of sent messages is full.
Cancel one of the messages you have sent,
if possible, or wait until you have received a
reply to one of those messages.
Erasing messages
You can erase a message while you are viewing it in your
message list.
On a telephone with a one-line display
Press ≥.
On a telephone with a two-line display
Press ERASE.
The Direct-Dial extension can receive up to four messages and it
can send up to 30 messages.
If your reply to a message is forwarded or is answered at another
extension using the Call Pickup feature, the message remains on
your extension until you cancel it or successfully contact the
extension that sent the message.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
270 Making internal calls
Paging
Paging allows you to make announcements over the Compact
Plus system using the telephone speakers or your loudspeaker
system, if one is available.
The administrator can assign extensions to one of three page
zones.
Making a page announcement
1. Press ≤fl‚.
2. Choose a page type:
⁄ or EXTNS through the telephone speakers (internal page)
¤ or SPKR through an external speaker (external page)
‹ or BOTH for both internal and external (combined page)
3. If necessary, choose a zone (0 to 3).
4. Speak clearly into the handset and make your announcement.
5. Press ®.
Paging shortcuts
Instead of entering the Page feature code followed by the page
type, you can enter the following shortcut codes:
• Internal (EXTNS)—≤fl⁄ and zone (1 to 3)
• External (SPKR)—≤fl¤ (no zones)
• Combined (BOTH)—≤fl‹ and zone (1 to 3)
Remote paging
To use features on a Compact Plus system remotely, press •
followed by the feature code. Even if you are calling from another
Compact Plus system, press • instead of ≤.
Making a remote page announcement
1. Dial the number to access your Compact Plus system.
2. Enter your Class of Service password.
3. Press •fl‚.
4. Choose a page type:
⁄ or EXTNS through the telephone speakers (internal page)
¤ or SPKR through an external speaker (external page)
‹ or BOTH for both internal and external (combined page)
5. If necessary, choose a zone (0 to 3).
6. Speak clearly into the handset and make your announcement.
7. Hang up.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Making internal calls 271
Voice call
Voice call allows you to make a voice announcement or begin a
conversation through the speaker of one other telephone in the
Compact Plus system. The person you call hears a tone before
your voice call comes through.
Making a voice call
1. Press ≤flfl.
2. Dial the extension for the person you want to speak to.
3. Wait for the beep, then speak.
Muting voice call tones
When a voice call begins at your telephone, you hear a beep every
15 seconds as a reminder that the microphone is on.
To stop the beeping, pick up the handset or press the key marked
Handsfree/Mute or Mute.
Preventing voice calls to your telephone
You can use Voice Call Deny to prevent your telephone from
receiving voice calls.
Press ≤°°. Voice calls ring as do regular internal calls.
Your other calls proceed normally.
To cancel, press ≤£°°.
Answering a voice call without touching your telephone
If Handsfree Answerback is assigned to your telephone, you can
respond to a voice call without touching the telephone. Handsfree
Answerback is not available to M7100N/T7100 and
M7000/T7000 telephones.
When someone makes a voice call to you, simply start talking.
Your telephone microphone picks up your voice.
Once you have answered a voice call, you treat it as a normal call.
Displays
P0607114 Issue 01
Dial voice call
Dial the extension number or press the
internal autodial key of the person to
whom you want to speak.
Microphone muted
Your Handsfree microphone is muted.
Press the key labelled Handsfree/Mute or
Mute, or pick up your handset to respond
to the voice call.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
272 Making internal calls
No voice call
The telephone receiving the call cannot
accept voice calls for one of the following
reasons:
• it is active or ringing with another call
• Call Forward is turned on
• Do Not Disturb is turned on
• Voice Call Deny is turned on
• it is not a Norstar/BST telephone
Your call proceeds automatically as a
regular ringing call.
Voice call
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
The line is open for you to speak.
P0607114 Issue 01
Forwarding calls
• Forwarding all calls.........274
• Line redirection.........276
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
274 Forwarding calls
Forwarding all calls
You can temporarily forward your calls to another telephone in
the Compact Plus system by using the Call Forward All Calls
feature.
If the telephone to which you forwarded your calls does not have
the same exchange lines as your telephone, the forwarded calls
appear on intercom keys.
If a call is forwarded, it does not ring but the line indicator flashes
on your telephone. You can still answer the call by pressing the
key next to the flashing indicator.
If you are one of a group of people who regularly forward their
calls to one another, be aware that it is possible to set up loops
where a call is forwarded from one telephone to another in a
circle, but it is not answered anywhere.
1. Press ≤›.
2. Enter the extension number of the telephone you want to
forward your calls to. The display shows Forward>nnn.
To cancel, press ≤£› or press CANCEL.
Note: You can also set the system to forward your calls to
another telephone when your telephone is busy or is not
answered.
Note the differences between Line redirection and Call
Forward. Call Forward forwards all calls that arrive at
your telephone to another telephone within the Compact
Plus system. Line redirection redirects only the lines you
specify, no matter which telephones they appear on, to a
telephone outside the Compact Plus system. Line
redirection takes precedence over Call Forward.
Overriding Call Forward
If you telephone someone who has their calls forwarded to your
extension, your call rings at that person’s telephone. In this way
you can still communicate with the forwarded extension.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Forwarding calls 275
External Call forward
Users can set individual extensions to forward calls using Call
Forward All Calls (CFAC).
You can also program to enable extensions to automatically
Forward Busy (CFB) or Forward No Answer (CFNA).
External Call Forward (ECF) is a feature that allows the same call
forwarding features to forward to external destinations. To allow
ECF, the individual extensions must:
• have access to a line pool
• be programmed to Allow Redirect: Y under
Terminals&Extns/Restrictions (extns).
ISDN and Network Call Diversion
On a Norstar system with ETSI ISDN lines, Call Forward
features have a slight variation in naming convention. The
functions remain the same. Features are labelled as follows:
• Call Forward Unconditional (CFU)—implemented on Norstar
CFAC ≤›.
• Call Forward on Busy (CFoB)—implemented on Norstar
CFB.
• Call Forward on No Response (CFNR)—implemented on
Norstar CFNA.
ISDN external lines use external Call Diversion if this is available
from the local exchange.
User Programming
Users cannot program individual extensions for CFB or CFNA.
Users can program their own extension to CFAC, as follows:
Internal Call Forward—Press ≤› at any extension, followed
by the internal number to which you want calls forwarded.
External Call Forward—Press ≤› at any extension,
followed by the route or line-pool code number, and then the
external number.
Note: The destination or line pool code and dialing digits
cannot exceed 24 digits. The set must have access to a
line pool and be programmed to Allow Redirect: Y
under Terminals&Extns/Restrictions(extns) to
allow external destination programming using≤›.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
276 Forwarding calls
Cancelling Call Forward
To cancel Call Forward, press ≤£›.
Line redirection
In a networked system, Line redirection allows you to redirect
calls coming in on your external lines to a telephone outside the
office. You can redirect exchange lines to AC15A private circuits,
AC15A private circuits to either exchange lines or private
circuits, and exchange lines to exchange lines.
Compact Plus supports simultaneous redirection of DIA calls,
subject to the same barring rules and depending on the
availability of outgoing resources.
You may choose to redirect all your exchange lines or only some
of them. The incoming trunk must have disconnect supervision
and the outgoing trunk must be answer supervised for Line
Redirection to perform properly.
You cannot use the Line redirection feature code at
M7100N/T7100 and M7000/T7000 telephones, or a telephone
connected to an Analogue Terminal Adapter.
You redirect lines at a telephone, but once redirected, the lines are
redirected for the entire system. You can only redirect lines for
which there are line keys on the telephone you are using.
How Line redirection is different from Call Forward
Call Forward forwards all calls that arrive at a particular
telephone to another telephone within the Compact Plus system.
Line redirection redirects only the lines you specify, no matter
which telephones they appear on, to a telephone outside the
Compact Plus system. Line redirection takes precedence over
Call Forward.
Using Line redirection
You redirect lines at a telephone, but once redirected, the lines are
redirected for the entire system.
You can only redirect lines that appear at line keys on your
telephone.
When redirecting DIA lines, ensure the outgoing resource is a
line pool with sufficient lines to support redirected traffic. The
number of appearances for a DIA line is not limited to the number
of appearances on that extension. As many DIA calls are
redirected as the outgoing resource permits.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Forwarding calls 277
You can answer the telephone if it rings while you are in the
middle of programming Line redirection, but none of the Norstar
call handling features are available until the feature times out. If
you need to use a Compact Plus feature to process the call, quit
Line redirection programming by pressing ≤. Do not press
® or you will disconnect the call you are trying to process.
While you are programming Line redirection, you do not receive
any indication of calls that do not actually ring at your telephone.
Be careful to avoid redirection loops. If for example, you redirect
your lines to your branch office and your branch office redirects
its lines to you, you can create a redirection loop.
In certain situations, callers may experience lower volume levels
when you redirect calls to an external location.
Redirecting your lines
1. Press ≤°›.
2. Select the outgoing line to be used for redirected calls.
3. Do one of the following to indicate where the line will be
redirected (maximum 24 digits):
• Enter the number from the dial pad, including routing codes
• press an auto-dial key that has the number programmed
• if the number is on a Saved Number Redial or Last Number
Redial key, press that memory key.
4. Press ≥ or OK.
Note: If the outgoing line is a private network line that does
not require you to dial digits, you do not need to perform step
3 or 4.
5. Wait until the line indicators for the selected lines are lit, then
press ≥ or OK.
If you press ≥ or OK before all the lines light up, those lines
not lit are not redirected.
The line chosen for redirecting calls on other lines can still be
used normally when it is not busy on a redirected call. To avoid
redirection failing because the chosen line is in use, choose a line
pool with several lines in it.
The system does not check that the number you give for Line
redirection is a valid one. If you redirect to an invalid number,
redirection fails. Using an Autodial key to enter the redirection
number helps avoid this possibility. An Autodial key used for
Line redirection must be programmed to use a specific line.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
278 Forwarding calls
Cancelling Line redirection
1. Press ≤£°›.
2. Select the lines you no longer want to be redirected.
If a telephone has Redirect ring enabled, it rings briefly for
redirected calls on one of its lines even if another telephone set up
the line redirection.
Displays while redirecting lines
Intercom
You selected the intercom key as the facility to
place the call on. Enter a line pool code or a
destination code.
Line redirection
QUIT ADD REMOVE
Press • or ADD to begin redirection. Press £
or REMOVE to cancel a previous redirection.
No line to use
You have one exchange line on your
telephone, but you need a second line to
perform Line redirection. Redirect your
exchange line using a line pool as the outgoing
line.
Outgoing line
You are attempting to redirect a line and the
line you have chosen is the outgoing line you
have selected as a destination. You cannot
redirect a line to itself. Select another line.
Pool code: _
QUIT
Enter a valid line pool access code.
Redir by 221
OVERRIDE
You have attempted to redirect a line, but
someone else has already redirected that line.
Press • or OVERRIDE to override the previous
redirection and redirect the line as you wish.
Redirect denied
You can only redirect calls on individual lines.
Select line out
QUIT
Select the line that will be used to redirect calls
out of the system.
Select line(s)
QUIT ALL
Press the lines to be redirected. To undo a line
selection, press it again. Press ALL to redirect
all your lines.
Select line(s)
ALL OK
Continue to press the lines to be redirected.
Press ≥ or OK when you are finished.
Unequipped line
The line you are attempting to redirect cannot
be redirected because the hardware does not
support redirection.
Displays while cancelling redirection
Select line(s)
QUIT ALL
Press the lines that are no longer to be
redirected. The lines light up as you press
them. Once you cancel redirection for a line,
you cannot restore it by pressing the line
again. Press ALL to cancel redirection for all
your lines. When you are finished, press ≥
or OK.
Select line(s)
ALL OK
Continue to press the lines that are no longer
to be redirected. Press ≥ or OK when you
are finished.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Saving time with features
• Using System Speed Dial.........280
• Using Autodial.........280
• Using Redial.........282
• Programming memory keys.........283
• Using Ring Again.........284
• Using Hotline.........285
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
280 Saving time with features
Using System Speed Dial
Frequently dialled numbers can be programmed with System
Speed Dial codes so that they can be accessed quickly with a
three-digit code. After programming Speed Dial codes, distribute
a list of System Speed Dial codes for your office.
1. Press ≤‚.
2. Enter the appropriate three-digit Speed Dial code
(001 to 255).
Note: To programme Personal Speed Dial codes (256 to 279) at
your extension, see ‘Personal Speed Dial codes’ on
page 231
Using Autodial
You can programme memory keys for one-touch dialling of
internal or external telephone numbers.
Keys used for lines, answer or Handsfree/Mute cannot be used as
Autodial keys.
If the power to your Compact Plus system is off for more than
three days, Autodial numbers (as well as some other system
programming) may be lost from the memory.
Autodial key for an external number
1. Press ≤•⁄. The display briefly shows Externl
autodial then Press a key.
2. Press the key you want to programme.
This step is not necessary on the T7100 or the M7100N
telephone which have only one memory key.
3. If you want this autodial key to use a particular line or line
pool, select that line or press the key labelled Intercom and
enter the line pool code or destination code.
Note: The keystation must be assigned with the lines or line
pools.
4. Enter the number. Press ≥ or OK when you are finished.
The display shows Programmed.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Saving time with features 281
Autodial key for an extension number
1. Press ≤•¤. The display briefly shows Internl
autodial then Press a key.
2. Press the key you want to programme.
The display shows Extn#:_.
This step is not necessary on M7100N/T7100 telephones,
which have only one memory key.
3. Enter the number. The display shows Programmed.
For the M7100N/T7100N telephones, an external autodialler can
only be programmed using a line and not a line pool.
If you do not include a line selection in an Autodial number, the
call uses your Prime line (if you have one).
Note: If line pool access codes or destination codes are changed,
remember to re-programme autodial numbers as well.
Displays
987_
QUIT BKSP OK
P0607114 Issue 01
Continue to enter digits until the number is
complete. Press the volume bar or BKSP to
erase an incorrect digit. Press ≥ or OK
when you are finished.
Autodial full
The memory allotted to Autodial numbers in
your Compact Plus system is full.
key erased
While programming external Autodial, you
erased the key by pressing ≥ or OK
before entering any digits.
Enter digits
QUIT OK
Enter the number you wish to programme
(choosing the line first if necessary) exactly
as you would if you were making a call.
Intercom #: _
QUIT
Enter the internal telephone number you
wish to programme.
Invalid number
You are programming an internal Autodial
key and have entered a number that is not
an extension number on your system. Enter
a valid extension number. If the number you
are entering is a destination code, use
external Autodial.
Press a key
QUIT
Press the memory key you want to
programme.
Program and HOLD
Enter the number you want to programme
to the key, then press ≥.
Program and OK
QUIT OK
Enter the number you want to programme
to the key, then press ≥ or OK. You may
include a line or line pool selection in an
Autodial sequence by selecting the line
before entering any digits.
Programmed
The number is stored on the key.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
282 Saving time with features
Feature moved
You have programmed an Autodial number
to a key that had a feature code
programmed. The feature has moved to
another key. Use ≤•‚(Key Inquiry
feature) to locate it.
Using Redial
You can save the number of any external call you dialled and call
it again later. You can also redial the last external number you
dialled.
Saving a number to redial later
While you are still on the call, press ≤fl‡.
Saved Number Redial records a maximum of 24 digits.
Redialling a saved number
Press ≤fl‡ when you are not on a call.
If you have a programmed Saved Number Redial key, you can
use ≤•‚(Key Inquiry), then press the Last Number Redial
key followed by £ to check the last number before you dial it.
You can disallow this feature in programming. Refer to
‘Preventing Saved Number Redial’ on page 94
Last Number Redial
Press ≤fi.
Last Number Redial records a maximum of 24 digits.
If you have a programmed Last Number Redial key, you can use
≤•‚ (Key Inquiry), then press the Last Number Redial key
followed by £ to check the last number before you dial it.
This feature can be disallowed on individual keystations. Refer to
‘Preventing Last Number Redial’ on page 94.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Saving time with features 283
Programming memory keys
You can programme a feature code to a memory key. When this
guide tells you to enter a feature code, you can press the memory
key as a shortcut. In some cases, pressing the key a second time
cancels the feature.
Any memory key not programmed as an external or internal
target line, intercom, Answer key, or Handsfree key is available
for programming features.
You can erase a memory key; however, you cannot erase Answer,
Handsfree, Intercom, or line keys.
You cannot programme the following feature codes to a memory
key:
• Long tones for signalling remote devices (see ‘Setting Long
tones’ on page 298)
•
Any code beginning with • except ≤•fi‚⁄
(Language Choice), ≤•‡ (Contrast Adjustment), and
≤•fi¤‚ to ≤•fi‹fi (SWCA keys).
When you programme a key with the line pool feature code, you
must enter a line pool access code after the feature code. The
programmed line pool key accesses a specific line pool, not the
line pool feature.
Programming a memory key
1. Press ≤•‹.
2. Press the key you want to programme with a feature.
This step is not necessary on the T7100 or M7100N
telephones, which have only one memory key.
3. Enter the feature code you want to assign to the key.
Erasing a key
1. Press ≤•⁄.
2. Press the feature key.
3. Press ≥ or OK to erase the key.
Displays
<Feature name>
SHOW OK
P0607114 Issue 01
The name of the feature assigned to a key
is displayed when you press the key. SHOW
appears when there is more information
available. Press £ or SHOW for additional
information.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
284 Saving time with features
Enter code:
If you are checking a Speed Dial key, enter
the three-digit Speed Dial code that you
want to check.
F_
QUIT CLEAR
Enter the feature code, or press ® or
QUIT to quit programming or CLEAR to clear
the numbers you have entered. The
system accepts the entry as soon as you
enter a valid feature code.
Feature code:
QUIT
Press ≤ and enter the feature code you
want to assign to the key. You cannot
enter invalid codes.
Feature moved
You have programmed a key with a
feature that was already programmed to
another key. The feature has moved to the
key you just programmed. Its original key
is now blank.
Press a key
EXIT
Press the key you want to check. Press
≤ or EXIT when you are finished.
Program and HOLD
Enter the number you want to programme
and press ≥. To erase the key, just
press ≥.
Program and OK
QUIT OK
Enter the number you want to programme
and press OK. To erase the key, press
≥ or OK.
Using Ring Again
If you cannot get through to someone on your Compact Plus
system because their telephone is busy or there is no answer, you
can use the Ring Again feature to tell you when they hang up or
next use their telephone. You can also use the Ring Again feature
to tell you when a busy line pool becomes available.
The Ring Again feature cannot be used with a hunt group.
1. Dial the extension number you want to reach.
2. Before you hang up, press ≤¤.
Cancelling Ring Again
Press ≤£¤.
Displays
Can't ring again
Ring Again? YES
NO EXIT
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
You cannot use Ring Again on your current
call. You can only use Ring Again while you
have a busy signal on an internal call or line
pool request, or while an internal call is
ringing.
Press YES to use Ring Again. Press NO if
you prefer to send a message.
P0607114 Issue 01
Saving time with features 285
Using Hotline
Hotline
A Hotline telephone calls a pre-set internal or external telephone
number when you pick up the handset of a Hotline telephone (or
press ¬).
Label the telephone to inform anyone using it that Hotline is
active.
Bypassing a Hotline
Press a line key, use the Pre-Dial or Automatic Dial feature, or
press the key labelled Intercom before you pick up the handset on
a hotline telephone. Refer to your Telephone Feature Card.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
286 Saving time with features
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Using display features
• Time and Date.........288
• Static Time.........288
• Call Duration Timer.........288
• Call Information.........289
• Call Log.........290
• Autobumping.........295
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
288 Using display features
Time and Date
The current time and date appear on the display of idle Compact
Plus telephones. Telephones connected to an Analogue Terminal
Adapter cannot display the time and date.
Checking the current time and date while on a call
You can briefly display the current time and date while you are on
a call by pressing ≤°‚‹.
Static Time
When you have a message or a Call Log item on the telephone
display, the time and date are not shown. The Static Time feature
allows the time and date to be displayed at all times.
• Press ≤°‚fl to turn Static Time on.
• Press ≤£°‚fl to turn Static Time off.
Call Duration Timer
Use the Call Duration Timer feature to see how long you spent on
your last call or how long you have been on your present call.
By pressing ≤‡‡, you can see how long
• you spent on your last call
• you have been on your present call
Displays
21 02:47
The display shows the last call you made or
the current call, and the total elapsed time
in minutes and seconds.
Line001 01:45
You parked your last call. The display
shows the length of time the call was
parked. You cannot see the length of time a
call was parked unless the call is active at
your telephone or has just been released by
your telephone.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Using display features 289
Call Information
Call Information is an optional supplementary service provided
by the public telephone company. If your business subscribes to
this service, you can view the name, number, or both, of an
external caller unless the caller has blocked the information.
Lines in your Compact Plus system may appear at more than one
extension. However, only one extension can receive Call
Information automatically for an incoming call. You programme
which Norstar/BST extension will automatically receive Call
Information. If Call Information is not delivered automatically to
your extension and your company subscribes to the service, you
can view Call Information using ≤°⁄⁄ (the Call
Information feature code).
ISDN terminals receive Call Information automatically if
supported by the terminal. Not all calls on ISDN lines necessarily
provide Call Information because of the way the call is routed, or
because the information was lost or corrupted. Call Information
gives you information about your active call or the highest
priority ringing call.
Call Information is more detailed than the Call Display
information you can receive without subscribing to Call
Information. For external calls, you can display the caller’s
telephone number, line name, or a combination of these items.
For an internal call, it is possible to display the caller’s name and
their extension number. It is also possible to display information
for ringing, answered, or held calls. Call Information displays
even if the call has been transferred, forwarded, or re-routed in
some way.
Call Log displays the same information as Call Information,
along with the date and time of the call, and the number of times
the caller called.
Note: You may continue to press line keys to get information on
other calls. If you press the same line key twice, you are
connected to that call. If you press any other key including
keys used to show more information about a call, you exit
the Call Information feature, and the key you pressed
performs its normal function.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
290 Using display features
Call Information symbols
Only incoming calls can be logged. Calls preceded by + are
outgoing and cannot be logged.
Symbol
Description
+
Indicates the number of the telephone you called (not an
incoming call).
…
Press • or VIEW to see the rest of the number.
ˆ
You cannot use another feature until you exit the Call
Information feature.
x
The number is incomplete (missing digits).
/
The number shown is too long. The last 14 digits are
shown following the /.
¯
The call shown in the Call Log has been answered.
Call Log
If your system is equipped with the appropriate equipment and
you have subscribed to the Call Information feature supplied by
your service provider, you can capture information about
incoming callers in your Call Log. The same feature is supplied
by an ISDN service package that comes with Calling Line
Identification (CLID).
You can protect the privacy of your Call Log by assigning a
password. A handy feature of the Call Log is that you can easily
use it to place calls to the numbers recorded.
Call Log creates a record of incoming external calls. For each
call, the log could contain the following:
•
•
•
•
sequence number in the Call Log
number of the caller
indication if the call was long-distance
indication if the call was answered (and identity of who
answered it)
• time and date of the call
• number of repeated calls from the same source
• name of the line that the call came in on
Call Log can help you to
• keep track of abandoned or unanswered calls
• track patterns for your callers (for example, volume of calls
and geographical location of calls)
• record caller information quickly and accurately
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Using display features 291
• build a personal telephone directory from log items
The long-distance indicator, as well as the caller’s number, may
not be shown in the log, depending on the Call Display services
provided by your local telephone company and the caller’s local
telephone company.
Setting which calls are logged at an extension
You can set which types of incoming calls are logged at your
extension. The options are
• No autologging
• No one answered (only for autologging extensions) (default
setting)
• Unanswered by me (only for autologging extensions) but
answered elsewhere in the system
• Log all calls (including those you answer)—applies to all
lines capable of providing Call Information, even if your
extension is not assigned as an autologging extension for that
line
1. Press ≤•°›.
2. Press £ or NEXT to change the options.
3. Press ≥ or OK to select the display option.
Setting your Call Log password
You can set a password for access to your Call Log to keep your
log private. From then on, you must enter this password to view
your Call Log.
1. Press ≤•°fi. The displays shows New passwrd:.
2. Enter your four-digit password. The display shows
Repeat New:.
3. Re-enter your four-digit password. The display shows
Password changed, which confirms that your password has
been assigned.
To enter Call Log using your password
1. Press ≤°⁄¤ to enter the Call Log. If you have
programmed a password, the display shows Password:.
2. Enter your four-digit password.
If you forget your Call Log password, it can be removed in
programming.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
292 Using display features
Changing your Call Log password
1. Press ≤•°fi. The display shows Old passwrd:.
2. Enter your old password. The display shows New passwrd:.
3. Enter your new four-digit password. The display shows
Repeat New:.
4. Re-enter your password. The display shows
Password changed, which confirms that your password has
been changed.
Removing your Call Log password
When you remove your Call Log password, anyone can access
your Call Log.
1. Press ≤•°fi. The display shows Old passwrd:.
2. Enter your old password. The display shows New passwrd:.
3. Press ≥ or OK. The display shows No pswd assigned,
which confirms that your password has been deleted.
Logging an incoming call (Logit)
If your calls are not automatically logged, you can manually log
Call Information when you are connected to an external call.
Storing information for your current call can be helpful in many
situations. For example, you may want to
• record a caller’s name and number without using paper and
pencil
• record only calls that you choose, as opposed to using Call Log
automatically
• quickly record caller information before a caller hangs up.
To log an external call manually:
Press ≤°⁄‹.
Note: If you programme the Call Log feature code to a memory
key with an indicator, the indicator lights when there are
new items in the log.
Viewing your Call Log
New items are shown with the first character underlined.
Press ≤°⁄¤.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Using display features 293
Use either the display keys or your keypad to navigate through
the log.
Action
Key
Display key
View log items you have viewed before
•
OLD
View the last item you viewed
‚
RESUME
View new items in the log
£
NEW
View the next item in the log
£
NEXT
Erase the item you are viewing
≥
ERASE
View more information on this item
Right side of the
volume bar
MORE
Trim digits from the beginning of the
number you are viewing prior to dialling
the number
Left side of of the
TRIM
Go back to the previous item
•
On entering the log
When viewing an item
volume bar
Placing a call to a number in the Call Log
You may find it helpful to place calls from within your Call Log.
The number stored for each call may vary depending on the type
of call. For example, if the call was placed from a Centrex or PBX
system, the first few numbers may need to be shortened before
you can make the call. If the number you want to call is
long-distance, or if you want to use a line pool, you may need to
add numbers.
To place a call
1. Display the log item for the call you want to place.
2. Display the associated telephone number.
3. Dial any extra digits required.
4. Press an exchange line or line pool key.
5. Lift the handset. (This is not necessary if Handsfree is
programmed at your telephone). The displayed number is
dialled.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
294 Using display features
While viewing the log, you can place a call to the number
displayed in the log.
1. If the number begins with digits that you do not need when
calling from your location, press the left side of the volume
bar or TRIM once for every digit that you want to remove.
2. Add any digits required to route this number to an appropriate
line (for example, 9 to get an outside line, if your system
requires it). Use the left side of the volume bar or BKSP to
erase incorrect digits. You cannot enter host system signalling
codes.
3. Select a line for the call as you normally would for making a
call of this type (for example, by pressing an appropriate line,
Intercom or Handsfree key, or by lifting the handset).
4. The displayed number is dialled.
Note: When you edit a number in the log to call that number, the
edits you make are not saved in the log.
Programming a telephone to log calls automatically
Your installer or sales support officer can programme each
telephone to log calls coming in on a line automatically.
Displays
1:Unknown number
The caller’s number is unavailable.
12_1234567890123
NEXT ERASE MORE
_ indicates a new item.
12¯1234567890123
NEXT ERASE MORE
¯ indicates that the call was answered.
12§1234567890123
NEXT ERASE MORE
§ indicates a long-distance call.
49/1234567890123
NEXT ERASE MORE
/ indicates that the stored number has
been shortened to its final 11 digits. Press
the volume bar or MORE to display
additional information about the call.
Call(s) bumped
One or more log entries have been
deleted by the Autobumping feature while
you are looking at the Call Log.
Hold or release
Hold or release your active call before
entering Call Log.
In use: SETNAME
The exchange line is in use.
Jan 4 9:00a 3X
NEXT ERASE MORE
The repeat call counter, shown along with
time and date, indicates the number of
calls you have received from the same
caller.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Using display features 295
Line001 ¯227
NEXT ERASE MORE
This call was answered at another
telephone (227).
Line001 ¯Logit
NEXT ERASE MORE
This call was logged manually.
Line001
NEXT ERASE MORE
This call was not answered.
Messages & Calls
MSG CALLS
There are one or more items in your
Message Waiting list, and there are one or
more new items in your Call Log. Press
≤°‚fl to change the first line of
the display to the current time and date.
New calls begin
You have viewed your last old log item and
can now view your new log items.
No info to log
No information is available for the call.
No log assigned
No log space has been assigned to the
telephone.
No resume item
The resume item has been removed
because of Autobumping. Repeat Call
Update or log reallocation while you are
looking at the Call Log.
Autobumping
Deleting log items
Your log has a set number of items that it can hold. When it
becomes full, new calls cannot be logged. When your log is full,
Autobumping automatically deletes the oldest Call Log item and
logs the new call.
To enable Autobumping
Press ≤°⁄fi. The display shows Autobump ON.
To disable Autobumping
Press ≤£°⁄fi. The display shows Autobump OFF.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
296 Using display features
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Special dialling features
• Special dialling features.........298
• Inserting a pause.........298
• Setting Long tones.........298
• Programmed Release.........299
• Recall.........299
• Run/Stop.........299
• Wait for Dial Tone.........300
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
298 Special dialling features
Special dialling features
Norstar/BST telephones can access a remote system or dial a
number on a private network by using host system access features
such as Recall, Pause, Wait for Dial Tone, and Run/Stop. These
features either send a special signal to the host system or allow
you to programme delays required by host systems to external
Autodial keys or Speed Dial codes.
Inserting a pause
The Pause feature enters a 3.5-second delay in a dialling sequence
on an exchange line. You may need this for signalling remote
devices, such as answering machines, or when dialling through to
PBX features or host systems.
You can programme more than one pause in an external Autodial
or Speed Dial sequence.
For pulse dialling, • inserts a 1.5-second pause into the dialling
sequence.
The pause symbol (›) uses one of the 24 spaces in a dialling
sequence.
Press ≤‡° while programming a dialling sequence.
Note: You can obtain a pause with one key press if you
programme the feature code to a memory key. More than
one pause can be programmed to an external Autodial key.
Setting Long tones
The Long tones feature allows you to control the length of a tone
so that you can signal devices such as fax or answering machines,
which require tones longer than the standard 120 milliseconds.
1. While on a call, press ≤°‚°.
2. Use the keypad to produce the appropriate tones. Each tone
sounds for as long as you hold down the key.
Note: Long tones can be used on any call except a conference
call.
You can use internal lines of the Compact Plus system to
activate a device connected to an Analogue Terminal
Adapter (ATA) in another area of your office or to
exchange lines to access devices outside the Compact Plus
system.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Special dialling features 299
Programmed Release
The Programmed Release feature performs the function of the
® key in a programmed dialling sequence. When the system
encounters a Programmed Release in a dialling sequence, it stops
dialling and hangs up the call.
The Programmed Release symbol (fi) takes up two of the 24
spaces in a programmed dialling sequence.
The system ignores any digits or commands that follow a
Programmed Release in a programmed dialling sequence.
Press ≤•°· while programming a dialling sequence.
Recall
If your Compact Plus system is connected to a PBX, you can use
a Recall signal to access special features. Programme Recall to a
memory key for one-touch access.
The Recall signal can also be included as part of a longer stored
sequence on an external Autodial key or in a speed dial code. The
Recall symbol (¤) uses two of the 24 spaces in a dialling
sequence.
If your Compact Plus system is connected to a host system, a
private branch exchange (PBX) for example, you can use a Recall
signal to access special features such as PBX Call Forward and
PBX Transfer.
While you are on a call or programming an Autodial key, press
≤‡⁄.
Run/Stop
Run/Stop inserts a break point into an Autodial or Speed Dial
number. This may be necessary when you are connecting to a
PBX or similar host system.
For example, you may call a company with an automated
receptionist that instructs you to dial the extension number you
need. You can programme the company number, a Run/Stop, then
the extension number on one external Autodial key. Press the
Autodial key once to dial the company number. When you hear
the automated receptionist, press the Autodial key again to dial
the extension number.
The Run/Stop symbol (fl) uses one of the 24 spaces in an Autodial
or Speed Dial sequence.
You can include up to three Run/Stop commands in a dialling
string. The system ignores a fourth Run/Stop, and any digits or
commands that follow it in a programmed dialling sequence.
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
300 Special dialling features
Press ≤•· while programming a dialling sequence.
Wait for Dial Tone
Wait for Dial Tone causes a sequence of numbers to pause until
dial tone is present on the line before continuing to dial. This is
useful if you must dial a remote system and then wait for dial tone
from that system before dialling the rest of your number.
The Wait for Dial Tone symbol (‡) uses two of the 24 spaces in
an Autodial or Speed Dial sequence.
1. Press ≤°‚› while programming a dialling sequence.
Displays
Invalid code
You have entered a code that can only be
used in a programmed Autodial or Speed
Dial sequence, not on a call you dial
directly. Programmed Release and
Run/Stop are for use in programmed
dialling sequences only.
Using pulse dialling for a call
If your external telephone lines use pulse dialling, you can
temporarily switch to tone dialling by pressing £ after selecting
the line. Tone dialling allows your system telephone to
communicate with devices and services that respond to tone
signals, such as automatic switchboards and fax or answering
machines.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Integrated Services Digital Network
(ISDN)
• ISDN services.........302
• Digital Network Adapter.........304
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
302 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
ISDN services
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) provides a fast,
accurate, and reliable means of sending and receiving data,
image, text, and voice information through the telephone system.
The Compact Plus system can support up to two Basic Rate
Interface (BRI) cards, each of which allows the connection of up
to four BRI loops. Each of these loops consists of two separate
B-channels that can be used to make two simultaneous voice or
data calls, or one data call and one voice call. A video call
requires the use of both B-channels on the loop. Your installer
configures the BRI loops for the Compact Plus system.
ISDN applications
Using the appropriate ISDN terminal equipment, you can access
a wide range of business applications.
• Videoconferencing and video telephony:
Videoconferencing offers instant visual and audio contact
between distant parties using either studio-based or desktop
ISDN terminals.
• Desktop conferencing: ISDN allows computer users in
distant locations to share and edit any image, data, or text file
on their own computer screen, while simultaneously
discussing the information.
• File transfer: ISDN allows you to transfer files containing
data, text, image, or audio clips, faster and cheaper than with
a conventional modem.
• Home working: Convenient retrieval, processing, and storage
of files is possible for the home worker, using ISDN lines to
give high-speed access to information held in the office.
• Group 4 fax: ISDN fax applications pride cost savings by
increasing transmission speed and quality of resolution.
• Remote LAN access: ISDN provides an affordable and fast
means for workers in remote sites (at home or branch offices)
to access local-area networks (LANs).
• Leased circuit back-up: Essential back-up for leased
KiloStream circuits can be provided using ISDN as required,
rather than duplicating costly permanent circuits.
• LAN to LAN bridging: LAN bridge/routers allow flexible
interconnection between LANs using ISDN, with charges
only incurred when information is actually transmitted.
• Broadcasting: Using ISDN and digital codecs, broadcasters
can convey music, news, and commentaries with absolute
clarity.
• Video surveillance: Dial-up access using videocodecs
provides advanced surveillance on demand.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) 303
• Accessing information services: The fast call set-up and high
bandwidth of ISDN are ideal for accessing information
services such as Internet and databases.
ISDN supported services
Compact Plus supports the following ISDN services:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
basic incoming calls
basic outgoing calls
Direct Inward Access
Calling Line Identification presentation
Multiple Subscriber Numbering
sub-addressing
bearer capabilities
teleservices
The Call Forward All Calls and Transfer features can be used
from ISDN terminals connected to Compact Plus.
Note that Norstar/BST extensions can accept voice calls only.
Video and data calls do not alert at a Norstar/BST extension.
Although an ISDN S-loop can support up to eight devices, the
loop has a limit of two B-channels. An ISDN data or voice
terminal uses one B-channel for an incoming or outgoing call. An
ISDN video terminal uses two B-channels for an incoming or
outgoing call. If both B-channels are in use, other devices on that
loop cannot make or receive calls until a B-channel is available,
or until both B-channels are available in the case of a video
terminal. Thus, the number of terminals installed on an S-loop
must take into account whether you require dedicated access for
the terminals on that loop.
Services not available
Compact Plus does not support the following ISDN services:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Terminating Line Identification
Three-Party Service
Incoming/Outgoing Calls Barred Service
Night Busy
Fixed Destination
Administration Controlled Call Diversion
Reasons for Release
Separate Channel Numbering
Note that Norstar/BST extension features, other than Transfer
and Call Forward All Calls, are not available to ISDN terminals.
In addition, you cannot retrieve a parked call, or reach a DirectP0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
304 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
Dial extension by using the Direct-Dial digit from an ISDN
terminal.
Digital Network Adapter
The Digital Network Adapter (DNA) is an optional device for use
with the Compact Plus CCU. It provides an integrated desktop
solution for voice, data, and Computer Telephony Integration
(CTI) services. You can also telecommute over a digital
telephone line to access high-speed network features from your
home by connecting to a DNA in your office. The DNA serves as
a terminal adapter (TA) and provides reliable high-speed end-toend digital connectivity between a personal computer and a
remote data server through the CCU and public network.
The DNA uses standard communication protocols such as Pointto-Point (PPP) and Multi-link PPP (MP) in applications such as
Internet access and remote LAN access.
A Norstar/BST telephone can also be connected to a DNA, to
access Norstar voice services. You can have a conversation at the
same time that your computer is connected to the Internet or
remote LAN, with no loss of CCU features.
This sharing of voice and data communication is made possible
by software in the CCU that provides dynamic bandwidth
allocation across the two channels of the connection. What this
means is both channels are used for data traffic. When you use the
telephone that is connected to the DNA, one channel of the
connection is for the voice conversation, while the data
connection continues on the other channel. When the voice call
ends, the extra bandwidth is once again available to the data
traffic.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Feature quick reference
• Compact Plus feature codes.........306
• ISDN terminal features.........309
• ATA extension features.........311
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
306 Feature quick reference
Compact Plus feature codes
Using Norstar features
1. Press ≤ and enter the desired feature code on the keypad.
OR
Press the programmed memory key.
2. Follow the display messages.
If you change your mind while entering a feature code, press ≤
to cancel. If you use the ® key to end a feature, you may drop
an active call.
To display what has been programmed on a memory key, enter
≤•‚ (the Key Inquiry feature code) and press the memory
key.
Note that Norstar/BST extensions can accept voice calls only.
Video and data calls do not alert at a Norstar/BST extension.
Feature
To activate
To cancel
Autobumping (Call Logs)
≤°⁄fi
≤£°⁄fi
Auto Attendant
Custom Call Routing
(CCR)
≤•°‹¤
Greetings
≤•°‹‹
System Answer
≤•°‹⁄
Background music
≤°fl
Call Camp-on
≤°¤
Call Duration Timer
≤‡‡
Call Forward All Calls
≤›
Call Log
≤°⁄¤
Call Log options
≤•°›
Call Log password
≤•°fi
Call Parking
≤‡›
Call Pickup Directed
≤‡fl
Call Pickup Group
≤‡fi
Call Queuing
≤°‚⁄
Class of Service password
≤fl°
Conference
≤‹
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
≤£°fl
≤£›
®
P0607114 Issue 01
Feature quick reference 307
Feature
To activate
To cancel
Contrast adjustment
≤•‡
Dialling modes
≤•°¤
Do Not Disturb
≤°fi
≤£°fi
Group listen
≤°‚¤
≤£°‚¤
Hold
≥
Holding a call exclusively
≤‡·
Key Inquiry
≤•‚
Last Number Redial
≤fi
Line pools
≤fl›
Line redirection
≤°›
≤£°›
(not available o T7100 or an
M7100N)
Logit (Call Logs)
≤°⁄‹
Long tones
≤°‚°
Memory keys
Programming
≤•‹
or ≤•¤
or ≤•⁄
Erasing
≤•⁄ then OK
Messages
Reply
≤flfi
≤£flfi
Sending
≤⁄
≤£⁄
View messages
≤flfi
Moving line keys
≤•°⁄
®
Page
General
≤fl‚
Internal
≤fl⁄
External
≤fl¤
Internal and external
≤fl‹
Pause
≤‡°
Priority call
≤fl·
To block a Priority call
≤°fi
Privacy
≤°‹
Programmed Release
≤•°·
P0607114 Issue 01
≤£°‹
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
308 Feature quick reference
Feature
To activate
Recall
≤‡⁄
Ring Again
≤¤
Ring Type
≤•fl
Ring Volume
≤•°‚
Run/Stop
≤•·
Saved Number Redial
≤fl‡
To cancel
≤£¤
Services
Ringing service
≤°‡⁄
≤£°‡⁄
Restriction service
≤
≤£°‡¤
Routing service
≤°‡‹
Show Time and Date
≤°‚‹
Static Time
≤°‚fl
System Wide Call
Appearance (SWCA)
≤•fi¤‚ to
≤•fi‹fi
Move clock forward by 1
hour
≤••‹·‹
Move clock back by 1 hour
≤••¤¤¤fi
≤£°‚fl
Speed Dial
Making a call
≤‚
Storing a Speed Dial
code
≤•›
Transfer
≤‡‚
Transfer to I-RAD
≤° ⁄‡
Trunk Answer
≤°‚‚
Voice call
≤flfl
Voice Call Deny
≤°°
Wait for Dial Tone
≤°‚›
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
≤£‡‚
≤£°°
P0607114 Issue 01
Feature quick reference 309
ISDN terminal features
The Call Forward All Calls and Transfer features can be used
from an ISDN terminal connected to Norstar. On most ISDN
terminals, you need to press one or more keys to access feature
services before you enter the feature code for these features. To
see what keys to press, consult the instructions that came with the
ISDN terminal.
Note: Although ISDN terminals may have Transfer and Call
Forward keys or display prompts, these keys do not
activate Compact Plus features. Always use the
appropriate procedure to access feature services, then
enter the feature code as described below.
Other Norstar/BST extension features are not available to ISDN
terminals. In addition, you cannot retrieve a parked call or use the
Direct-Dial digit to reach a Direct-Dial extension from an ISDN
terminal.
Call Forward All Calls
Using the Call Forward All Calls feature
The Call Forward All Calls feature allows you to forward your
calls to another telephone in your Compact Plus system.
1. Press •›•.
2. Enter the number of the extension you want your calls
forwarded to, followed by £.
3. Enter the appropriate key to send.
Cancelling Call Forward
1. Press £›£.
2. Enter the appropriate key to send.
Transfer
Using the Transfer feature
The Transfer feature allows you to transfer a call to an internal or
external telephone. Depending on how you have programmed
your system, you may not be able to transfer a call on one
exchange line to another exchange line.
Depending on the type of ISDN terminal, you may have to press
a service key to access feature services (consult the instructions
that came with your ISDN terminal).
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
310 Feature quick reference
1. Press •‡‚•.
2. Enter the number of the extension you want to transfer the call
to, followed by £.
3. Enter the appropriate key to send.
Cancelling Transfer
Depending on the type of ISDN terminal, you may have to press
a service key to access feature services (consult the instructions
for your terminal).
1. Press £‡‚£.
2. Enter the appropriate key to send.
Line access from an ISDN terminal
Note that ISDN terminals do not have line keys or intercom keys
as does a Norstar/BST telephone. To make an outgoing call from
an ISDN terminal, access an exchange line by entering a line pool
code or a destination code.
Making or receiving calls involving two B-channels
For incoming calls that require two simultaneous B-channels,
Compact Plus requires that calls be made sequentially to two
distinct numbers, rather than simultaneously to the same number.
In the case of a DIA call, the same DIA line can be used but the
ISDN extension needs to have the number of appearances for that
DIA line to 2.
For example, in the case of a Presence video terminal, the first
call establishes a 1B video connection and the second call
establishes the 2B video connection.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Feature quick reference 311
ATA extension features
The Analogue Terminal Adapter (ATA) connects a digital Norstar
telephone port to a standard analogue voice device. It is most
commonly used to attach to a single-line telephone or a data
communication device such as a modem or facsimile machine.
Refer to the ATA Terminal Feature Card for complete
information.
Feature
To activate
To cancel
Alternate line
˚¤
Call Forward
˚•›
Call parking
˚•‡›
Call pick-up (Directed)
˚•‡fl
Call pick-up (Group)
˚•‡fi
Call Queuing
˚•°‚⁄
Call Waiting
˚•°‚⁄
Camp-on
˚•°¤
Conference call
˚•‹
Hold Call (Exclusive)
˚•‡·
Hold Call (Public)
˚¤
Last Number Redial
˚•fi
Line Pool selection
˚•fl›
˚£›
Page
General
˚•fl‚
Intercom
˚•fl⁄
External
˚•fl¤
Intercom/External
˚•fl‹
Priority call
˚•fl·
Privacy control
˚•°‹
Reach through
Recall
˚•‡⁄
Pause
˚•‡°
Timed release
˚•‡¤
Restriction override
˚•fl°
Ring Again
˚•¤
Saved Number Redial
˚•fl‡
P0607114 Issue 01
˚£¤
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
312 Feature quick reference
Feature
To activate
To cancel
Send Message
˚•⁄
˚£⁄
StarTalk or
Norstar Voice Mail
Access mailbox
˚•·°⁄
Leave a message
˚•·°‚
System Speed Dial
˚•‚
Tones
˚•°‚·
Transfer
˚•‡‚
Trunk Answer from any
telephone
˚•°‚‚
Voice call
˚•flfl
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
˚£°‚·
P0607114 Issue 01
Appendix A: Programming overviews
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
314 Appendix A: Programming overviews
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Charts
• Chart 1: System Speed Dial.........316
• Chart 2: Naming extensions.........316
• Chart 3: Naming lines.........317
• Chart 4: Time and Date.........317
• Chart 5: Direct-Dial.........318
• Chart 6: Restriction filters.........319
• Chart 7: Remote Access Packages.........320
• Chart 8: Extension restrictions.........321
• Chart 9: Extension capabilities 1.........322
• Chart 10: Extension capabilities 2.........323
• Chart 11: Extension capabilities 3.........324
• Chart 12: Extension capabilities 4.........325
• Chart 13: User preferences.........326
• Chart 14: Extension relocation.........327
• Chart 15: Copying settings.........327
• Chart 16: ATA settings.........328
• Chart 17: Ringing service.........329
• Chart 18: Restriction service.........329
• Chart 19: Routing service.........330
• Chart 20: Passwords.........331
• Chart 21: Call Log passwords.........332
• Chart 22: Call Services.........333
• Chart 23: Auto Attendant.........334
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
316 Charts
Chart 1: System Speed Dial
Sys speed dial
SHOW
Speed dial #: __
SHOW
Use prime line
SHOW
Display digits:
Enter
System
Speed
Dial number
from 001 to
Enter a System
Speed
Dial number
01 to 70.
The number is displayed. Press NEXT.
PressZ CHANGE to select outgoing facility:
Use prime line2
Use line: ___ (enter line)
Pool code: __ (enter pool access code)
Use routing tabl
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes) and N (No).
NEXT
Appears only if Display digits is set to N (No).
Enter a name.
Name:
NEXT
Bypass restr'n:
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes) and N (No).
Chart 2: Naming extensions
Terminals&Extns
SHOW
Show extn#:
Enter extension number.
SHOW
ZZ
Line
access
Z
NEXT
Capabilities
Z
NEXT
Name:
Press CHANGE and enter new name. Press NEXT.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Charts 317
Chart 3: Naming lines
Lines
SHOW
Show line:
Enter line number.
SHOW
ZZ
Press CHANGE and enter new name.
Name:
Z
Chart 4: Time and Date
Time&Date
SHOW
Press CHANGE and enter hour (2 digits). Z
If between 00 and 12, select AM or PM.
Hour:
NEXT
Minutes:
Z
Press CHANGE and enter minutes (00-59).
NEXT
Press CHANGE and enter year (2 digits).
Year:
NEXT
Month:
Press CHANGE and enter month (01-12).
NEXT
Day:
P0607114 Issue 01
Press CHANGE and enter day (01-31).
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
318 Charts
Chart 5: Direct-Dial
System prgrming
SHOW
Hunt groups
NEXT
Featr settings
NEXT
Direct-dial
SHOW
D-Dial 1:
Press CHANGE to select Intrnl, Extrnl, or None.
SHOW
Intrnl#:
If Intrnl or Extrnl #, press CHANGE and enter number.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Charts 319
Chart 6: Restriction filters
Restrictions
SHOW
Restrn filters
Z
SHOW
Show filter:_
Z
Enter a restriction filter number (01 to 99).
SHOW
Restrn flt:nn
SHOW
Restrn nn:
SHOW
No restrictions
ADD
Rest'n# 01:
SHOW
Enter digits to be restricted. Press OK.
Press ADD to add more restrictions to this filter.
Press REMOVE to remove a restiction from this
restriction.
Deny:#
NEXT
No overrides
ADD
Override 001:
P0607114 Issue 01
Enter digits to be excluded from this restriction.
Press ADD to add more overrides to this restriction.
Press REMOVE to remove an override from this
restriction.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
320 Charts
Chart 7: Remote Access Packages
System prgrming
SHOW
Hunt groups
NEXT (4 times)
Remote access
Z
Z
SHOW
Rem access pkgs
NEXT
Rem line access
Press ≠ and enter pkg#.
Press ≠ to see settings: LinePool access,
Remote page, Remote admin, and Remote monitor.
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes) and N (No).
Press ≠ and enter line number.
Press CHANGE and enter remote package number.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Charts 321
Chart 8: Extension restrictions
Terminals&Extns
SHOW
Show extn#:_
Enter extension number.
SHOW
Line access
NEXT
Z
Capabilities
NEXT (3 times)
Z
Restrictions
SHOW
Restrn filters
NEXT
Extn restrn
SHOW
Filters
NEXT
ExtnLock:
NEXT
Allow last no:
NEXT
Allow saved no:
Press CHANGE to select None, Full, or
Partial.
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes)
and N (No).
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes)
and N (No).
NEXT
Allow recall:
NEXT
Allow redirect:
P0607114 Issue 01
Press CHANGE to chooose between Y (Yes) 2
and N (No).
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes) 2
and N (No).
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
322 Charts
Chart 9: Extension capabilities 1
Terminals&Extns
SHOW
Show extn#:_
Enter extension number.
SHOW
Line access
NEXT
Capabilities
SHOW
Fwd no answer
Press ≠ to see the setting.
Press CHANGE to enter an extension number.
NEXT
Forward delay
(If Fwd no answer is set to an extension)
Press CHANGE to select 2, 3, 4, 6, or 10 rings.
HEADING
Fwd no
on answer
busy:
NEXT
Fwd on busy
Press ≠ to see the setting.
Press CHANGE to enter an extension number.
NEXT
DND on busy:
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes)
and N (No).
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Charts 323
Chart 10: Extension capabilities 2
Terminals&Extns
SHOW
Enter extension number.
Show extn#:_
SHOW
Line access
NEXT
Capabilities
SHOW
Fwd no answer
NEXT (3 times)
Handsfree:
Press CHANGE to select None, Auto, or Std.
NEXT
HF answerback:
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes)
and N (No).
NEXT
Pickup grp:
Press CHANGE to select None, 1, 2, 3, or 4.
NEXT
Z
Z
Press CHANGE to select None, 1, 2, or 3.
Page zone:
Z
NEXT
Paging:
P0607114 Issue 01
Z
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes)
and N (No).
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
324 Charts
Chart 11: Extension capabilities 3
Terminals&Extns
SHOW
Show extn#:_
Enter extension number.
SHOW
Line access
NEXT
Capabilities
SHOW
Fwd no answer
NEXT (8 times)
D-Dial:
Press CHANGE to choose between Extn1
and None.
NEXT
Priority call:
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes)
and N (No).
NEXT
Hotline:
Press CHANGE to select None, Intrnl#,
or Extrnl#.
Z
Z
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Charts 325
Chart 12: Extension capabilities 4
Terminals&Extns
SHOW
Show extn#:_
Enter extension number.
SHOW
Line access
NEXT
Capabilities
SHOW
Fwd no answer
NEXT (11 times)
Aux. ringer:
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes)
and N (No).
NEXT
Redirect ring:
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes)
and N (No).
NEXT
Receive tones:
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes)
and N (No).
NEXT
ATA settings
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
326 Charts
Chart 13: User preferences
User prefernces
SHOW
Press ≠ to see the setting.
Model
NEXT
Key prgrming
Press ≠ to see settings.
NEXT
User speed dial
Press ≠ to see speed dial codes.
NEXT
Call log opt'ns
Press ≠ to see settings. Press CHANGE to
select from No one answered, Unanswerd by me,
Log all calls, and No autologging.
NEXT
Dialling opt'ns
Press ≠ to see settings. Press CHANGE to
select from Automatic dial, Standard dial,
and Pre-Dial.
NEXT
Language
Press CHANGE to choose between English and Opratng.
NEXT
Z
Z
Press CHANGE to select level.
Display cntrst:
Z
NEXT
Ring type:
Z
Press CHANGE to select ring type (1-4).
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Charts 327
Chart 14: Extension relocation
System prgrming
SHOW
Hunt groups
NEXT
Featr settings
SHOW
Backgrnd music
NEXT (17 times)
Extn relocatn
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes) and N (No).
Chart 15: Copying settings
Terminals&Extns
SHOW
Show extn#:_
Enter extension number.
221:221
Press COPY
Copy:SYSTEM data
Press CHANGE to choose between SYSTEM data
and SYSTEM+USER.
NEXT
COPY:SINGLE
Press CHANGE to select SINGLE, RANGE, or ALL.
NEXT
Copy to:
P0607114 Issue 01
(If SINGLE or RANGE is selected)
enter extension number(s) as prompted.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
328 Charts
Chart 16: ATA settings
Terminals&Extns
SHOW
Show extn#:_
Enter extension number for the ATA or I-ATA .
SHOW
Line access
NEXT
Capabilities
SHOW
Fwd no answer
NEXT (14 times)
ATA settings
SHOW
ATA ans timer:
Press CHANGE to select 3, 5, 7, or 10 seconds.
NEXT
ATA mode:
Press CHANGE to choose between Tone and Pulse.
NEXT
Z
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes) and N (No).
ATA tones:
NEXT
ATA use:
Z
Press CHANGE to choose between On-site
and Off-site.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Charts 329
Chart 17: Ringing service
Services
SHOW
Ringing service
SHOW
Ringing groups
NEXT
Sched:Night
SHOW
Service:
Press CHANGE to select from Manual,
Auto, and Off.
Chart 18: Restriction service
Services
SHOW
Ringing service
NEXT
Restrn service
SHOW
Sched:Night
SHOW
Service:
P0607114 Issue 01
Press CHANGE to select from Manual,
Auto, and Off.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
330 Charts
Chart 19: Routing service
Services
SHOW
Ringing service
NEXT (2 times)
Routing service
SHOW
Routes
NEXT
Dest codes
NEXT
Sched:Night
Press CHANGE to select from Manual,
Auto, and Off.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Charts 331
Chart 20: Passwords
Passwords
SHOW
COS pswds
(Appears only if using SAPLUS password).
Press ≠ and enter password #.
Then press ≠ to enter new password.
NEXT
Call log pswds
NEXT
Progrming pswds
SHOW
SysCoord+:
(Appears only if using SAPLUS password).
Press CHANGE to enter new password.
NEXT
Sys coord:
Press CHANGE to enter new password.
NEXT
Basic:
Press CHANGE to enter new password.
HEADING
Progrming pswds
NEXT
IRAD pswd
P0607114 Issue 01
Press CHANGE to enter new password.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
332 Charts
Chart 21: Call Log passwords
Passwords
SHOW
COS pswds
NEXT
Call log pswds
SHOW
Show extn#:
Enter extension number.
SHOW
Log pswd:
Press CHANGE to reset password to None.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Charts 333
Chart 22: Call Services
Terminals&Extns
SHOW
Show extn#:_ _ _
Enter extension number.
SHOW
Line access
NEXT
Capabilities
NEXT
(4 times)
Call services
SHOW
Auto call info
NEXT
1stDisplay
Press CHANGE to choose between Numbr and Line.
NEXT
Auto Called ID:
Press CHANGE to choose between Y (Yes)
and N (No).
NEXT
Log space
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
334 Charts
Chart 23: Auto Attendant
System prgrming
SHOW
Hunt groups
NEXT (3 times)
Auto Attendant
SHOW
Auto Attend
NEXT
Attd Extn:
Press CHANGE to enter new extension number.
NEXT
System answer
Press ≠ to see the setting for After:.
Press CHANGE to select number of rings (2 to 12).
NEXT
Press ≠ to see the setting for After:.
Press CHANGE to select number of rings (2 to 12).
CCR
NEXT
CCR lines2
NEXT
CCR groups
Press ≠ and enter group number.
Press ≠ to see extensions in group.
Press CHANGE to choose between Assigned and
Unassgnd.
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
P0607114 Issue 01
Index
A
AbsorbLength 166
AC15A
assigning a filter 89
Administration password
erasing 173
setting up 173
Advice Line 38
Alarm extension 141
alpha tagging
system speed dial 63
Analogue equipment
settings 152
Analogue Terminal Adapter
delay before answering 152
dial mode 153
feature codes 311
system tones 154
used off-site 155
used on-site 155
Answer keys
assigning 44
using 242
answering calls
Call Pickup 240
external 234
hunt group calls 235
internal 234
queued 235
Trunk Answer 241
ATA
See Analogue Terminal Adapter
attendant phone
choosing 191
P0607114 Issue 01
Auto Attendant 188
Autobumping
feature 295
Autodial
external number 280
internal number 280
using intercom key 280
Automatic Telephone Relocation 146
auxiliary ringer
programming 109
B
Background Music
On hold 132
programming 132
using 230
Barring calls
using restriction filters 80
Basic password 173
British Telecom
address 38
Broadcast 124
button defaults
T7316 Business Series Terminal 213
T7316E Business Series Terminal 210
C
Call barring
using restriction filters 80
Call Camping
feature 254
Call capture
settings that enhance 31, ??–37
Call Duration Timer 288
Compact Plus System Administration Guide 335
Index 336
Call Forward All Calls 35
Call Forward All Calls (ISDN) 309
Call Forward No Answer
setting up 98
Call Forward on Busy
setting up 100
Call holding 246
Call Information
symbols 290
viewing 289
Call Log
Autobumping 295
erasing password 178
feature 290
Logit 292
password 291
programming 294
selecting options 114
setting extension 291
viewing 292
Call Park 250
Call Pickup
directed 240
group 241
Call Pickup Directed
programming 139
Call queuing 235
Call Routing 160
Call Services
Auto Called ID 180
1st Display 179
Camp timeout
programming 133
CAP
KIM and T7316E call icons 212
KIM plus T7316E 211
line assignment 41
See Central Answering Position
CCR customised greetings 196
CCR destinations 197
CCR group
adding or removing extensions 193
Central Answering Position
feature 215
line assignment 41
centrex template
T7316 buttons 214
Class of Service password
changing 91, 263
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
changing dialling filter 91
erasing 92
feature 263
setting up 90
using 263
Conference Call
feature 259
Conference tone 138
contrast adjustment 116
Control extensions
definition 158
programming 168
copying
programming 147
COS
See Class of service password
Custom Call Routing
customising 190
greetings 189
testing 197
turning on and off 191
Cyclical 124
D
defaults
buttons, T7316 Business Series Terminal 213
buttons, T7316E Business Series Terminal 210
destination code 165
Dialling
setting 224
dialling features
long tones 298
pause 298
Programmed Release 299
Recall 299
Run/Stop 299
Wait for dialtone 300
Dialling filters
AC15A private circuit 80
AC15A private circuits 89
extensions 80
lines 80
overriding 86
dialling modes 224
dialling options 114
dialling restriction
defaults 81
P0607114 Issue 01
Index 337
DID template
T7316 buttons 214
Digital Network Adapter
features 304
Direct dial extension 144
Direct-Dial extension
assigning a telephone 76, 106
external extension 77
internal extension 76
programming 76
using 266
disconnecting accidentally 243
display
common feature messages 219
contrast 116, 225
keys 18
language 115
VIOC 115
distinctive ring pattern
Hunt Group 123
DNA
See Digital Network Adapter
DND
See Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
feature 230
Do Not Disturb on Busy
cancelling 101
setting up 101
E
exchange code 258
extension
Alarm 141
Direct dial 144
locking off 93
locking on 93
naming 68
programming 98
relocation 146
restriction filters 83
F
feature 218
Analogue Terminal Adapter feature codes
311
Autobumping 295
Autodial 280
Automatic hold 246
P0607114 Issue 01
Background Music 230
Call Camping 254
Call Duration Timer 288
Call Forward All Calls 274
Call Forward All Calls (ISDN) 309
Call Forward No Answer 98
Call Forward on Busy 100
Call Information services 289
Call Park 250
Call Pickup, directed 240
Call Pickup, group 241
Call queuing 235
Class of Service passwords 263
Conference Call 259
Contrast adjustment 116
Dialling modes 224
Do Not Disturb 230
Exclusive hold 246
Group Listen 243
Hold 246
hunt groups 235
Key Inquiry 225
Last Number Redial 94
Line Pool 258
Line redirection 276
Logit 292
Long tones 298
Messages 267
Paging 270
Pause 298
Personal Speed Dial 231
Priority Call 253
Privacy 234
Programmed Release 299
Recall 299
Remote access packages 182
Ring Again 284
Ring type 227
Ring volume 227
Ringing service 158
Run/Stop 299
Saved Number Redial 94
Services 158
Show time 288
Static Time 288
System Speed Dial 280
Time and Date 288
Transfer 253
Trunk Answer 241
Voice Call 271
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Index 338
Voice Call deny 271
Wait for dialtone 300
feature display messages 219
G
greetings
customised 194
pre-recorded 194
Group Listen 243
H
Handsfree
answerback 103
muting 239
programming 102
using 239
Held line reminder 137
Hold
automatic 246
exclusive 246
Hotline
assigning a telephone 108
bypassing 108, 285
cancelling 108
using 285
Hunt Group
distinctive ring pattern 123
hunt group calls 235
Hunt groups
adding and removing members 121
and videophones 120
assigning and unassigning lines 122
checking metrics 128
hunt delay 125
if line is busy 125
member order 122
method of distribution 124
overflow extension 127
queue timeout 126
Hybrid template
T7316E buttons 211
hybrid template
T7316 buttons 214
I
intercom keys
programming 43
using for Autodial 280
interrupting a call
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
See Priority Call
I-RAD password 175
ISDN terminals
Call Forward All Calls 309
feature codes 309
features 302
line access 259
supported services 303
transfer call 309
using 259
K
key assignments
M7100N telephone 217
M7208N telephone 216
M7310N telephone 216
Key Inquiry 225
keys
Autodial 280
Call Log 293
display 18
keypad 15, 18
labelling 226
moving 226
telephone 15
KIM
call icons 212
CAP line assignment 41
CAP station 211
T7316E defaults 210
L
language
display 115
VIOC 115
Last Number Redail
preventing 94
Line
assigning filters 84
assignment 40
naming 69
line access
ISDN terminals 310
Line Pool
feature 258
Line pool access
programming 42
Line redirection
cancelling 278
P0607114 Issue 01
Index 339
feature 276
using 276
Line Ringing
See Line assignment
lines
assigning to a hunt group 122
CAPN/CAP lines 41
Listen on hold 247
listening in a group 243
locking
an extension 93
log calls
See Call Log
log space
allocation 140
Logit 292
long tones
feature 298
M
Maintenance
overview 200
map, programming 21
Memory keys
erasing 283
feature code 283
programming 283
Messages
erasing 269
feature display 219
replying 268
sending 267
viewing 267
moving telephones 146
music
background 132
On hold 132
M7100N telephone 217
M7208N telephone 216
M7310N telephone 215
M7324N telephone 214
N
Network callback 137
Night Service
See Services
Night service 158
Norstar feature codes 306
numbering plan 161
P0607114 Issue 01
O
Originating Line Identification 252
overlay, programming 14
overriding
Call Forward 274
P
Page timeout 140
Page tone 139
Page zone
setting up 104
Paging
features 270
programming 105
remote 270
Park Mode
programming 135
Park timeout
programming 134
Parking a call 250
Passwords
Admin 173
Basic 173
Call Log 291
erasing 178
I-RAD 175
SAPLUS 172
using 29
PBX template
T7316 buttons 214
T7316E buttons 211
Personal Speed Dial
feature 231
Pickup group
setting up 104
Prime line 42
Priority Call
allowing 107
feature 253
Privacy 234
programming
Call Log 294
Call Pickup 240
Control extensions 168
copying 147
Do Not Disturb on Busy 101
extensions 98
map of Administrator Plus programming
20
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Index 340
maps of 21
memory keys 283
overlay 14
programming basics
entering passwords 18
programming system features
Page timeout 140
Page tone 139
pulse dialling 300
Q
queued call 235
R
re-allocating log space 140
Recall
setting up 95
Receive tones 110
receiver volume
programming 133
redialling a number 282
Redirect ring
setting up 109
turning off 109
regulatory information 12
relocation of extension 146
Remind delay 137
Remote access
defaults for packages 182
filter 89
packages 182
Remote paging 270
ring
Ringing service 158
Ring Again
cancelling 284
feature 284
ring pattern
Hunt Group 123
Ring type
changing 116
feature 227
Ring volume
feature 227
Ringing service 158
activating 158
cancelling 158
feature 158
routing
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
DIA calls 251
Routing service
programming 161
Run/Stop 299
S
SAPLUS password 172
Saved Number Redial
preventing 94
Sequential 124
Services
Control extensions 168
Restriction service 158, 160
Ringing service 158
Routing 160
schedule 158
Trunk Answer 241
turning off with a feature code 167
Show time 288
Software Keys 58
Speed Dial
personal 113, 231
system 62
using 231
Square template
T7316E buttons 211
square template
T7316 buttons 214
Static Time
feature 288
Symbols
keys 290
System Answer 188
customised greetings 194
pre-recorded greetings 194
testing 197
turning on and off 191
System ID 58
system settings
Direct dial extension 144
System Speed Dial
assigning a number 62
bypassing restrictions 65
feature 280
setting up 62
system speed dial
alpha tagging 63
system version number 201
P0607114 Issue 01
Index 341
T
W
telephone
moving 146
M7100N 217
M7208N 216
M7310N 215
M7324N 214
telephone keys 15
template, button assignments 213
testing
Custom Call Routing 197
System Answer 197
Time and Date
changing 71–74
feature 288
Show 288
timing a call 288
Transfer Callback delay
programming 136
transferring a call
feature 253
ISDN 309
Troubleshooting 203–206
Trunk Answer
using 241
T7316 Business Series Terminal
button defaults 213
T7316E
call icons 212
CAP lines 41
CAP station 211
T7316E Business Series Terminal
button defaults 210
Wait for dialtone
feature 300
Symbols
£ 276
› 275
V
version number
system software 201
VIOC
See Visually Handicapped Operator Console
Visually Impaired Operator Console 115, 218
Voice Call
answering 271
features 271
making 271
muting tones 271
preventing 271
P0607114 Issue 01
Compact Plus System Administration Guide
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement